Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (195 trang)

Anh 7

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.27 MB, 195 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b> Week 1</b>

<b> Period 1 </b>

INTRODUCTION THE SUBJECT






-Introduction oneself (about the teacher)
-Introduce the subject (about)


-Show the students how to prepare a lesson, the notebooks for this subject.
- They learn how to learn English well.


-Present some greetings, past words. (How to greet the teacher, do as the teacher requires….)
-Good afternoon, Mr. Tam


-How are you? We are fine, thank you.


-Listen to me, please._ repeat, Please. (Again, please)
-Look at me. (this)


-Go to the board and write, please.
-Ask _ answer


-Right or wrong?
-stand up


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

<b> Week 1</b>

<b> Period 2</b>

<i><b>Unit 1</b></i>

:

<i><b>BACK TO SCHOOL</b></i>


<b> A. Friends</b>



A

1, 2

<b> I Objectives:</b>



-Pupils can greet and introduce one another.
-Training pupils’ reading comprehension skill.
<b> II. Language contents:</b>


<i><b> a. Grammar:</b></i>
- Revision:


*The structures: “nice to meet you”,”nice to see you”, “This is…..”
*Present simple tense.


- Comparatives
<i><b> </b></i><b>b.</b><i><b> Vocabulary: </b></i>


Different (adj), bigger (than), unhappy (adj), miss (v), parents (n), a lot of (lots of) = many.
<b> III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b> IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures
<b> V. Procedures</b>:


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


*<b>Warm up</b>


* <b>Presentation</b>:


<b>CHATTING</b>


- Teacher introduces the name. Then
asking pupils about their names.



- Asking something about their new school
year:


(?) Do you have any new friends this school
year?


- Pupils listen to teacher and answer.


- Teacher Introduce the lesson <b>(</b>by giving
the picture of three pupils<b>)</b>


Ba and Nga are old friends. They meet
each other after the summer holiday. There
is a new friend in their class. Her name is
Hoa. They are very happy.


-Ps read the dialogue in pair.


* A<i><b>1</b><b>: Listen. Then practice</b></i>
<i><b>with a partner:</b></i>


<b>NEW WORDS</b>


- Nice to meet / see you (exp)


- Nice to meet/see you again(exp)


- Classmate ['kla:smeit]/ (n)
- I’m in class 7A.



- I’m, too = So am I


- (I’m in grade 7. /So am I)
<b>ANSWER A1</b>


a.The new girl’ name is Hoa.
b.She is in class 7A.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<b>Practice</b>:


<b>Controlled practice.</b>


<b>*Free practice: </b>


<b>* Warm up:</b>
<b>* Pre-reading: </b>
<b>While-reading:</b>


<b>* Post-reading: </b>
<b>* Practice in real life:</b>


-Ask some pairs to read the dialogue before
the class.


-Ask and answer the questions in pair.
- Teacher asks pupils to work in groups:
Making the dialogue with book and then
without book.


- Teacher checks some groups before the


class.


-Teacher asks pupils to say some
information about Hoa (She is a new
classmate. She’s in class 7A. Nga, Ba and
Nam are in her class, too.) Listen to more
some information about Hoa.


- Teacher helps pupils to understand the
meanings of the words and how to
pronounce them.


- Pupils listen to teacher or the tape.
+ The first time of listening: books closed
+ The second time: Ps repeat after the
cassette


- Teacher checks pupils’ pronunciation.
- Pupils work in groups: Making the
dialogue with book and then without book.
- Pupils look at the second picture and
answer the questions.


- Pupils work in groups: ask and answer the
questions.


- Teacher gives the third picture, compares
Hoa’s old school and Hoa’s new one so that
pupils can remember the information.



- Teacher checkis some pupils’ answers
before the class.


(?) Are you happy on the first day of new
school year?


(?) Why are you happy?


<i><b>A</b><b>2</b><b> Read. Then answer the</b></i>
<i><b>questions</b></i><b>.</b>


<b>NEW WORDS</b>
-parent/ 'peərənt/ (n)


-still / stil/ (adv)


-different from ['difrənt] (a)


-unhappy [ʌn'hæpi] (adj)


-miss [mis](v)


-Lots of = a lot of = much =
many


- Chúng ta dùng ‘a lot of’ và ‘lots
of ‘với danh từ không đếm được
và danh từ số nhiều.


- a lot of / lots of time


- a lot of / lots of pictures
- Chúng ta thường dùng a lot of
và lots of trong câu khẳng định,
còn many và much chủ yếu
dùng trong câu phủ định và nghi
vấn.)


**big +ger → bigger(than)
ADJ +ER THAN


<b>ANSWER A2:</b>
a.Hoa is from Hue.


b.She is staying with her uncle
and aunt.


c.No, she doesn’t.


<b>V. Homework</b>:


- Learn by heart the new words and the structures.
- Write the words and the answers on your notebooks.
- Write the short summary about Hoa’s story.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

<b> Week 1</b>

<b> Period 3</b>

<i><b>Unit 1</b></i>

:

<i><b>BACK TO SCHOOL</b></i>


<b>A. Friends</b>



A

3, 4, 5

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Training pupils listening skills


- Pupils can review some ways of greeting in certain situations.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


Just review some words and the other structures.
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures


<b>V. Procedures</b>:


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>*Warm up</b>


<b>*Presentation</b>


<b> * Practice </b>


* <b>Pre-listeningA4</b>:


* <b>While-listening</b>:


<b>CHATTING:</b>


(?) How do you say greeting to your
friends when you meet ?


(?) How do you say greeting to your


teacher or an older person when you meet
him or her?


Good morning.
Good afternoon.


-Pupils listen and answer the questions.
- Introducing the lesson <b>(</b>Teacher gives
the picture of two persons<b>) </b>Mr. Tan is
Nga’s teacher.


- Teacher plays the tape.(Books closed
and Books opened).


- Pupils listen to the tape:


+ The first time of listening: books closed
+ The second time: Ps repeat after the
cassette


- Pupils work in pairs: Making the dialogue
with book and then without book.


- Teacher plays the tape.(Books closed
and Books opened).


- Pupils practice greeting to each other
due to the dialogue they’ve learnt.


- Pupils give some greetings to some


kinds of people (young to old) and how to
respond.


- Teacher gives the whole class four


<i><b>A</b><b>3</b><b>. Listen. Then practice</b></i>
<i><b>with a partner:</b></i>


<b>ANSWER A4</b>


Dialogue A


Mr. Tan: Hello, Lien. <i><b>How are</b></i>
<i><b>you</b></i>?


Miss Lien: <i><b>Pretty good</b></i>, thank
you. <i><b>How about you</b></i>,
Tan?


Mr. Tan: <i><b>Not bad</b></i>, but I’m very
busy.


Miss Lien: <i><b>Me, too</b></i>.
Dialogue B


Nam: Good afternoon, Nga.


<i><b>How is everything?</b></i>


Nga: <i><b>OK</b></i>, thanks.<i><b> How are </b></i>


<i><b>you today</b></i>, Nam?
Nam: <i><b>Just fine</b></i>, thanks
Nga: I’m going to lunch


How are you today? Just
fine


How are you? Not
bad.


How is everything? Pretty
good.


How about you?
OK.


So am I
Me, too.


How are you today? Just
fine


How are you? Not
bad.


How is everything? Pretty
good.


How about you?



OK.
So am I


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

* <b>Post-listening</b>:
.


pictures and reminds them about the
situation of each picture.


<i>For example</i>:


1. Who are they in the picture?
2. Where are they?


3. What are they doing?


- Pupils listen to each dialogue and
complete it by choosing the suitable
sentence or phrase to fill in the blank.
(Pupils complete on the papers) given by
the teacher.


- Some pairs of pupils practice the
dialogues before the class.


- Pupils listen the dialogue once without
writing anything.


. - Teacher explains how to do this kind of
exercise.



- Teacher lets pupils listen the dialogue
once without writing anything.


- Teacher asks pupils to look at the
pictures again and to listen one more time,
and then write the numbers on the
pictures after listening.


- Pupils look at the pictures again and
listen one more time, and then write the
numbers on the pictures after listening.
- Some pupils give the answers under the
pictures on the board.


room


Nam: <i><b>Yes, So am I</b></i>.


<i><b>A</b><b>5</b><b> Listen. Write the letters</b></i>
<i><b>of the dialogues in the</b></i>
<i><b>order you hear.</b></i>


<b>ANSWER:c,b,d,a.</b>


Ba :Good evening ,Mr
Tan.


Mr Tan: Good evening,Ba
.How are you?



Ba :Find .thanks.


Mr Tan :Are you going home
now?


Ba :Yes,My dinner will
be ready.


<b>V. Homework</b>:


- Learn by heart the structures of greeting.
- Learn by heart A6


- Do Exercise 3 in exercise book page 4.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

<b> Week 2</b>

<b> Period 4</b>

<i><b>Unit 1</b></i>

:

<i><b>BACK TO SCHOOL</b></i>


<b> B. Names and addresses</b>



B

1, 2, 3

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Asking and answering about personal information.
- Introducing the third person.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>
* Grammar:


Simple present tense.



1. Where do you live?
2. How old are you?


3. What’s your family name?
4. What’s your middle name?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


(n) family name, middle name, age, home address
(v) talk to


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>* Warm up:</b>


<b>* Presentation:</b>


<b>* Controlled </b>
<b>practice: </b>
<b>*Free practice:</b>


<b>SINGING A SONG</b>


<b>- Teacher teaches pupils a song.</b>


<b>- Pupils listen to the song</b>.


- Introducing the lesson by giving the
picture of page 15 to the students and
elicit the situation of the scene, and then
teacher writes the questions on the
board.


- Teacher asks pupils to listen and
answer teacher’s questions before
listening to the tape.


1. What’s her name? Hoa
2. How old is she? 13


3. Where does she live? 12 Tran
Hung Dao Street.


- Teacher plays the tape.


+ The first time of listening: books
closed.


+ The second time: Ps repeat
-Read the dialogue in pair.


-Read and answer the questions in
group.


Ask some pairs to read ,answer .write


the correct answer.


<b>MERRY CHRISTMAS</b>
(We wish you a merry Christmas)3


and a happy new year
Good tidings to you whenever you


are


Good tidings for Christmas
and a happy new year.


<i><b>B</b><b>1</b><b>. </b></i><b>Listen. Then practice with a</b>


<b>partner</b><i><b>:</b></i>
<b>Vocabulary</b>:


-Family name (n)
-Middle name (n)
<i><b>Now answer</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


1. It’s Nam.


2. Her name’s Hoa.
3. She’s in class 7A.


4. She lives on Tran Hung Dao
Street.



5. She’s 13.
<i><b>Key B2</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

<i><b>B</b><b>2</b><b>. Pre-writing:.</b></i>


<i><b>*While-writing:</b></i>


<i><b>*Post-writing:</b></i>
<b>.</b>


<i><b>*Ask . answer b3</b></i>


<i><b>*Consolidation</b></i>


-Teacher helps pupils to practice
greeting to each other due to the
dialogue they’ve learnt.


- Teacher uses the picture again and
asks:


1. Who’s that?


2. What’s her name?
3. Which class is she in?
4. Where does she live?
5. How old is she?


- Teacher asks pupils to complete the
dialogue written on a sub-board.



- Teacher asks some pairs of students
to read the dialogue before the class.
- Teacher corrects if necessary


- Pupils listen to teacher and answer the
questions.


- Pupils listen to the tape:


+ The first time of listening: books
closed


+ The second time: Ps repeat after the
cassette


- Pupils work in pairs: Making the
dialogue with book and then without
book.


- Pupils practice greeting to each other
due to the dialogue they’ve learnt.


- Pupils listen to the teacher and
answer.


- Pupils complete the dialogue written
on a sub-board.


- Some pairs of students read the


dialogue before the class.


- Pupils practice in pairs. Ask and
answer the questions. Then, write in the
notebooks.


1. What’s your name?
2. How old are you?
3. What class are you in?
4. What’s the name of your


school?


5. What’s your home address?
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


- Age (n)
- Grade (n)


- Home address (n)
<b>Fill in the blanks with What, </b>
<b>Where, Who, How</b>


1. …….. is your family name? It’s
Nguyen.


2. …….old are you? I’m 12.


3. …….. do you live? On Nguyen Du
Street.



4. …….. do you live with? My
Remember:


1. What’s your name?


2. What’s your family name?
3. What’s your middle name?
4. What class (grade) are you in?
5. How old are you?


6. What’s the name of your school?
7. What’s your home address?
8. Where do you live?


9. Who are you living with?
10. Where is your school?


<b>V. Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

<b>Week 2 Period 5</b>

<i><b>Unit 1</b></i>

:

<i><b>BACK TO SCHOOL</b></i>


<b> B. Names and addresses</b>



B

4, 5.

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Asking and answering about personal information.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>



* Grammar:


1. Where do you live?


2. How do you go to school?
3. How far is it from …to…?


4. Prepositions: in, on, at, by, about?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


market, bus stop, movie theater, post office, kilometer, how far, about.
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


* <b>Warm up:</b>


* <b>Presentation</b>:


* <b>Controlled practice</b>:


-<b>Teacher gives the exercise.</b>
<b>-Ps complete in group.</b>


Teacher asks pupils to do questions
to elicit their attention to the main


purpose of this part of the unit.


1.Where does Hoa live?
2.How does she go to school?


- Pupils do questions to elicit their
attention to the main purpose of this
part of the unit.


- Pupils practice reading and finding the
new words in pairs.


Pupils practice in groups.


- Pupils look at the pictures and listen
to teacher.


<b>Fill in the blanks with What, </b>
<b>Where, Who, How</b>


1. …….. is your family name? It’s
Nguyen.


2. …….old are you? I’m 12.


3. …….. do you live? On Nguyen
Du Street.


4. …….. do you live with? My
<i><b>B</b><b>4</b><b>. Listen. Then practice with a</b></i>


<i><b>partner:</b></i>


<i><b>Vocabulary:</b></i>
-far (a)
How far…?
-about (prep)
on LeLoi street


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<b>Free practice</b>:
.


- Pupils practice asking and answering
in pairs, then change the roles.


- Teacher lets them play the role of
Nam/Hoa, then exchange. -Teacher
asks pupils to practice in pairs.


- Teacher lets pupils to look at the
pictures.


- Teacher explains the task and give a
model.


- Teacher has pupils practice asking
and answering in pairs, then change
the roles.


<i><b>B</b><b>5</b><b>. Ask and answer with a</b></i>
<i><b>partner.</b></i>



<i>-How far is it from your house to</i>
<i>the movie theater?</i>


<i>It’s………..</i>
<i>Remember</i>:<i> </i>


1. How far is it from <i>your</i>
<i>house</i> to <i>school</i>?


2. It’s <i>about 2 km</i>.
3. Where do your live?
4. How do you go to school?


<b>Consolidation:</b>


Complete the dialogue:


An: __________ you live?


My: I live __________ 12 Le Loi street.


An: How far is it __________ your house to your school?
My: It’s not __________, about 2 kilometers.


An: __________ do you go to school?
My: I go to school __________ bicycle.


<b>V. Homework</b>:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<b>Week 2 Period 6</b>

<i><b>Unit 1</b></i>

:

<i><b>BACK TO SCHOOL</b></i>


<b> B. Names and addresses</b>



B

6, 7.



<b>I. Objectives:</b>Training pupils listening and writing skills .Training pupils’ abilities in observing and giving
remarks about the distance, practicing the questions with “how far …..”(noticing some measurements:
meter, kilometer…)


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Wh-questions..?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: Movie theatre, distance, means of transport, survey.
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


* <b>Warm up: </b>


<b>* Pre-listening</b>:


<b>* While-listening:</b>


<b>Playing bing</b>



<b>- Pupils play game.</b>


<b>- Teacher asks pupils to look at the</b>
<b>picture. Teacher helps pupils to</b>
<b>recognize the places in the map:</b>
<b>Lan’s house, school, post office,</b>
<b>market, theater.</b>


- Teacher asks some suggesting
questions:


(?) Is Lan’s house near / far from
school?


(?) Is Lan’s house near the market / the
post office / the theater?


 <i><b>The first time of listening: Teacher</b></i>
asks pupils to listen and find out four
distances in the dialogues (for the best
pupils).


- Teacher gives the sub-board with
some suggestions :


<i>- From school to Lan’s house</i>


<i>- From Lan’s house to the post office</i>
<i>- From Lan’s school to the movie</i>
<i>theater</i>



<b>- Teacher draws 9 squares, then</b>
<b>fills in those squares rhe names</b>
<b>of places.</b>


Post


office Toyshop School
Book


store Market Bank
Bus


stop


Movie


theatre Zoo


If pupils have three follow words
which like teacher’s they’ll win, and
shout ”bingo”.


<i><b>B</b><b>6</b><b>. Listen and write</b></i>


<i><b>How far is it? Write the four</b></i>
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


-Distance (n)
-Movie theatre (n)


ANSWER;


1. School to Lan’s house: 300
meters


2. Lan’s house to the post office: 700
meters


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

<b>*Post-listening</b>


<i>- From the movie theater to the post</i>
<i>office</i>


 Teacher asks pupils to listen to<b> the</b>
<b>second time </b>and fill the measurements
of distances.


 <i><b>The third time: Teacher asks pupils</b></i>
to listen and check again.


- Teacher checks pupils by asking them
to write the results they’ve heard.


-


- Teacher asks pupils to write these
sentences on their notebooks.


- Pupils listen and find out four
distances in the dialogues (for the best


pupils).


.- Pupils listen and check again.


- Pupils write the results they’ve heard.
- Pupils ask and answer about these
distances again (pairs of pupils).


- Pupils write these sentences on their
notebooks.


- pupils read through the form and elicit
the types of question needed.


- Pupils ask and answer in pairs, and
then fill in the survey form.


- Pupils check the form in pairs.


4. Movie theater to post office : 2
kilometers


<b>B7. </b><i><b>A survey</b></i>


- Teacher gives a survey form and
explain the instruction.


- Teacher let them read through the
form and elicit the types of question
needed.



+ What’s your name?
+ What’s your address?
+ How do you go to school?
+ How far is it from your house to
school?


<b>Consolidation:</b>


<b>Match the questions with the answers</b>.


1. What class are you in? – 13.


2. What’s your name? – M y Xuan Village.


3. How old are you? – 7A.


4. Where do you live? – TRINH


<b>V. Homework</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

<b> Week3 </b>

<b> Period 7</b>

<i><b>Unit 2</b></i>

:

<i><b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b></i>


<b> A. Telephone numbers</b>



A

1, 2, 3.

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Training pupils how to say telephone numbers and identify numbers through listening skill
<b>II. Language contents:</b>



* Grammar:


*Simple future tense
*Numbers


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


Telephone number, answer the phone.
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b> METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


* <b>Warm up:</b>


<i><b>*Pre- Reading:</b>.<b> </b></i>


<i><b>*While-reading:</b></i>


<i><b>*Post-reading:</b></i>


<i><b>A2.</b></i>


<i><b> </b><b> </b></i><b>Presentation</b>
<i><b>Activity1</b></i>


<b>Writing the answers</b>



- Write the answers to the questions
about yourself:


<b>TELEPHONE DIRECTORY</b>
- Teacher introduces how to read the
telephone numbers.


- Teacher asks pupils to look at the
page and guess what it comes from.
- Teacher elicits how to read
telephone number.


- Teacher explains how to read the
numbers with a focus on
combinations.


- Teacher lets pupils read aloud the
numbers.


- Teacher has them practice in pairs.
Teacher plays the cassette and lets
students write down the numbers.
- Teacher checks pupils’ answers.
- Teacher lets them listen again.


- Teacher has pupils cross-check the
answers.


- Teacher has pupils write in the


notebooks.


- Teacher asks some questions:


 Do you often talk with someone on
the phone?


 Do you know the question asking
for telephone numbers?


* <b>Pupils answer the questions</b>
<b>about themselves.</b>


+ What is your name?
+ How old are you?
+ Where do you live?


+ How far is it from your house to
school?


+ How do you go to school?


<i><b>A1. Read</b>.</i>
<b>Vocabulary:</b>
-telephone number
-telephone directory
<i>How to read</i>:


 0: oh, zero



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<i><b>Activity2</b></i>


<i><b>Activity3</b></i>


<b> A3.Presentation: </b>


<i><b>Controlled- Practice:</b></i>


<i><b>Free- Practice:</b></i>


 Do you know how to give your
telephone number to others?
- Teacher has pupils close their book
and listen to the recording.


- Teacher lets them retell Hoa’s
number and questions in the
conversation.


- Teacher lets them listen to the
questions again while reading the
conversation.


- Teacher asks some questions:


 Do you often talk with someone on
the phone?


 Do you know how to give your
telephone number to others?


- Teacher has pupils close their book
and listen to the recording.


- Teacher lets them retell Hoa’s
number and questions in the
conversation.


- Teacher lets them listen to the
questions again while reading the
conversation.


- Pupils listen to teacher.


- Pupils look at the page and guess
what it comes from.


- Pupils read aloud the numbers.
- Pupils practice in pairs.


- Pupils listen to the tape and write the
numbers.


- Pupils listen again.


- Pupils write in the notebooks.


- Pupils listen to teacher and answer
the questions.


- Pupils close their book and listen to


the recording.


- Pupils retell Hoa’s number and
questions in the conversation.


- Pupils listen to the questions again
while reading the conversation.


- Pupils practice in pairs.


- Some pairs play role the
conversation.


<i><b>A2.</b></i>


<i><b> </b><b> Listen and write the telephone</b></i>
<i><b>numbers.</b></i>


a. 8251654
b. 8250514
c. 8521936
d. 8351793
e. 8237041
f. 8821652


<b>A3 Listen</b>


- What’s your telephone number?
- 826817



<i>* Simple Future</i>


S + will / shall + bare_inf…
I will / shall = I’ll


<b>V. Homework</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<b>Week3 Period 8</b>

<i><b>Unit 2</b></i>

:

<i><b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b></i>


<b> A. Telephone numbers</b>



A

4, 5, 6, 7.

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Training how to talk on the phone


- Pupils can make arrangements and talk about future plans
- Training pupils’listening skill.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>
* Grammar:


- The future simple with “Where will we….?”,”We’ll…”
- The structures : “Would you like to…?”, “Don’t be late!”


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.



<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<i>* </i><b>Warm up</b><i>:</i>


<i>* </i><b>Presentation:</b>


<i><b>*Controlled </b></i>
<i><b>practice:</b></i>


<b>*Free practice</b>:


<b>- </b>Two pupils stand at the board, make a
conversation (Ask and answer some
private information according to the
teacher’s suggestions).


 <b>Greetings</b>
 <b>Asking address</b>


 <b>Asking telephone number</b>
Teacher asks pupils to look at the
picture in the book and answer some
questions:


 Who are in the picture?
 What are they doing?
 What is Phong’s telephone



number?


*Listen the second time (books open).
-Teacher introduces more about the
simple future tense.


-Teacher introduce the structure:


“Would you like + to-inf…?” a polite
invitation.


 Ex: Would you like to see a
movie?


 Yes, I’d like to / Sure


-Teacher Introduce the sentence “Don’t
be late!”


-Teacher helps pupils read the
structures .


Pupils listen to the last one.


<i><b>A</b><b>4</b><b>.Listen and read.Then answer</b></i>


<i><b>the questions.</b></i>
<b>Vocabulary</b>:


-. free (a)



-Would you like + to_inf…?
-sure (a)


-great (a)


-Don’t be late (expr)
<b>Questions</b>:


1. Phong and Tam will meet
tomorrow.


2. They will see a movie.
3. They will meet at 6:45
4. They will meet in front of the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

<i>* </i><b>Pre-listening</b><i>:</i>


<i>* </i><b>While-listening</b><i>:</i>


* <b>Post-listening</b>:


<b>TEACHING THE </b>
<b>SIMPLE FUTURE </b>
<b>TENSE</b>


- Pupils look at the picture in the book
and answer some questions


1. Do you sometimes go to the movie ?


2. Would you like to see a movie?
3. Do you want to go to see a movie?
4. How do you get to the theater?
5. Where do you often meet?


- Pupils listen the first time (books
closed).


-Listen the second time (books open).
- Pupils listen each sentence and repeat
after the cassette-player.


- Teacher lets pupils write the correct
answers on the board.


-Teacher has them copy in their
notebooks.


- Teacher gives pupils some suggested
questions (Teacher may ask or help
pupils to ask and answer)


+ Do you like to see a movie?
+ Where do you often see a movie?
+ How do you go to the movie theater?
- Pupils practice in pairs.


- Teacher lets them ask and answer the
questions in pairs.



- Teacher asks individual pupils to
answer the questions before the class.
- Teacher asks them further questions
- Pupils cross-check their answers with
one another.


-Pupils write the correct answers on the
board.


* Teacher asks them to pick out all the
sentences of the new tense “will +
bare_inf”


- Teacher explains when the simple
future tense is used.


<i><b>A</b><b>5</b></i>: Listen. Then write the
<i><b>answers.</b></i>


<b>ANSWER A5:</b>
a) 8545545
b) A movie
c) Lan’s house
d) Bus


THE SIMPLE FUTURE TENSE
<i><b>Use:</b></i>


Dùng để diễn tả một hành động se
xảy ra trong tương lai.



<i><b>Form:</b></i>


1. Affirmative:


S + will / shall + bare_inf
Full forms Short forms
I shall / will


You will
She will
He will
We shall / will


You will
They will
I’ll
You’ll
She’ll
He’ll
We’ll
You’ll
They’ll
2. Negative:


S + will / shall + not + bare_inf
<i>Notes</i>:


Shall not = shan’t
Will not = won’t


3. Interrogative:


Shall / will + S + bare_inf…?


<b>V. Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Learn by heart the structure.


<b>-</b> Do Exercise A 4,5 (T may give some cues for how to do the exercise)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

<b> Week 3 Period 9</b>

<i><b>Unit 2</b></i>

:

<i><b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b></i>


<b>B. My birthday</b>



B

1, 2, 3, 9.

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Pupils learn to ask about the dates, how to invite someone to somewhere.
- Pupils can talk about future plans


- Training pupils four basic skills.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


- Ordinal numbers.
- Months in a year.



<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<i><b>A</b><b>1</b><b>. Listen and repeat</b></i>
<i>* </i><b>Warm up</b><i>:</i>


<i>* </i><b>Presentation</b>:


<i><b>*Activity1:</b></i>


<i><b>*Activity2:</b></i>


<i><b>*Activity3:</b></i>
<b>*Teaching B2:</b>
<i>* </i><b>Pre-listening</b><i>:</i>


<i>* </i><b>While-listening</b><i>:</i>


<b>COUNT.</b>


- <b>Teacher asks pupils to count from</b>
<b>one to thirty_one or more.</b>


<b>- Teacher asks: “</b><i><b>How many days</b></i>
<i><b>are there usually in a month</b></i><b>?”</b>
-T introduces the ordinalnumbers.


- Mention the different ending sounds
of first 1st<sub>, second 2</sub>nd<sub>, third 3</sub>rd<sub> in the</sub>


ordinal number.


- Pupils listen to teacher.


- Teacher lets them listen to the tape
the first time.


- Teacher lets them listen to the tape
the second and ask them to repeat the
tape chorally.


- Some pupils read aloud.
- Pupils practice in pairs.


- Teacher lets them listen to the tape
the first time.


- Teacher lets them listen to the tape
the second and ask them to repeat the
tape chorally


- Teacher lets them listen to the tape
the first time.


- Teacher lets them listen to the tape


<b>Ordinal numbers:</b>


1. first
2. second
3. third
4. fourth
5. fifth
6. sixth
7. seventh
8. eighth
9. ninth
10. tenth
11. eleventh
12. twelfth ...


<b>B2</b><i><b>.Listen and write the dates.</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

* <b>Post-listening</b>:
-


* <b> Practice</b>


<b>*Controlled practice</b>


* <b>Free practice</b>


.


the second and ask them to repeat the
tape chorally


- Pupils listen the second time (books


open). Pupils listen each sentence
and repeat after the cassette-player.
- Pupils cross-check their answers
with one another.


- Pupils write the correct answers on
the board.


-Pupils practice with your partner by
themselves.


- Teacher gives pupils some dates
and guides pupils to practice with your
partner by themselves.


- Teacher gives pupils some dates
and guides pupils to practice with your
partner by themselves.


- Pupils read the months from first to
twelfth and some students repeat.
- Pupils write the months in the
required order and do crosschecking
of the answers.


- Pupils write the sentences on the
board and give the correct order.
- Pupils write the summary in their
notebooks.



- Pupils read in chorus and then
practice with their partner.


<b>B3</b>: Write the months in order


<i><b>from first to twelfth.</b></i>
- Calendar.


- Year
- Leap year
* <b>Month</b>
January
February
March
April
June
July
August
September
October
November
December


<b>V. Homework</b>:


<b>-</b> Learn by heart the structure.


<b>-</b> Do Exercise B3 (T may give some cues for how to do the exercise)


<b>-</b> Prepare period 10:Lesson B4, B5, B6



<b> Week 4 Period 10</b>

<i><b>Unit 2</b></i>

:

<i><b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<b>B. My birthday</b>



B

4, 5, 6.

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Asking and answering questions about birthday.
- Training pupils how to use the simple future tense.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


- What’s your date of birth?
- When’s your birthday?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


- Day, nervous, worried, birthday, next.
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>*Warm up:</b>
<b>* Presentation : </b>



<b> *Controlled practice:</b>


<b>Free practice: </b>


<b>B5. Activity2: </b><i><b>.</b></i><b> </b>


- <i>Teacher helps<b> pupils to correct B4 in</b></i>
workbook.


- Teacher introduces the new lesson.
- Ps listen to the tape or teacher.
- Pupils listen to the tape the first time.
(books closed)


- Pupils listen to the tape the second
and they repeat the tape chorally.
- Pupils find out the sentences in
which the simple future is used.


-some students read the dialogue
aloud and then role play it.


- Students practice in pairsto find out
the new words.


- Some pairs read before the class.
- Students read the dialogue again
and then ask them to complete the
form of their own.



- Students read the passage to
themselves.


- Pupils practice in pairs ask and
answer about Lan.


- Pupils do more free practice about
themselves.


Teacher explains how to fill out a
registration form.


- Teacher has one or two students


<b>B4. Listen. Then practice with a</b>
<b>partner.</b>


<b>Vocabulary:</b>
- date


date of birth


What’s your date of birth?
- address


What’s your address?
- next


- nervous


- worry
worried
- on + date
<b>Answer:</b>


1.She is thirteen now.


2. On her next birthday, she’ll be 14.
3. It ‘s on june the eighth.


4.She lives with her uncle and aunt.
5.Beause she doesn’t have any
frients.


<b>About you.</b>


6.I’ll be fourteen on my next
birthday.


7. My address is in my xuan village.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

<b>B6. Activity3: </b>


<b>* Warm up:</b>
<b>* Presentation : </b>
<b>* Practice</b>


<b>*Controlled practice</b>
<b>*Free practice</b>



complete the form on the board.


- Teacher has them copy the form in
their exercise books and fill out their
own form.


- You are going to read about Lan.
What’s she thinking about? (A party?)
What is she doing now? (invitation
card)


- Read and find out the answers to
these questions.(given on the
sub-board)


-When is her birthday?


- Teacher introduces some vocabulary
- Teacher asks students some
pre-reading questions.


- Teacher asks students questions
about Lan and her party.


- Teacher has them practice in pairs
ask and answer about Lan.


- Teacher let them do more free
practice about themselves.



.-Read and complete the card.
-Ps copy .


<i><b>B6:Read. Then complete the card:</b></i>
<b>New words</b>


-Party
-Invite
invitation
Invitation card


-Start = begin finish
<i><b> the card</b><b> :</b></i>


<i>-Sunday,May25.</i>


<i>-24 Ly Thuong kiet Street.</i>
<i>-5;00 to 9:00.</i>


<i>- Lan</i>
<b>V. Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Learn by heart the structure and the vocabulary.


<b>-</b> Do Exercise B4 (T may give some cues for how to do the exercise)


<b>-</b> Prepare period 11:Lesson B7, B8


STUDENT REGISTRATION
FORM



<i><b>Name</b></i>: Pham Thi Hoa


<i><b>Date of birth</b></i>: June eighth.


<i><b>Address</b></i>: 12 Tran Hung Dao
Street


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<b> Week 4 Period 11</b>

<i><b>Unit 2</b></i>

:

<i><b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b></i>


<b>B. My birthday</b>



B

6, 7.

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Asking and answering questions about birthday.
- Training pupils how to use the simple future tense.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


- Revision three forms and how to use the simple future tense.


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>



<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


*<i><b>Warm up:</b></i>


<b>* </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Presentation</b></i>:


*<b>Controlled practice:</b>


<i><b>*Free practice:</b></i>


<b>*Teaching B8:</b>
<b> *Activity1:</b>


<b>WRITING THE GIFT;</b>
Ask sts to the gifts,


T introduces the the new lesson by giving
the picture of Lan’s birthday party and
asks the students some sentences.


<i>Are there a lot of students at the party?</i>
<i>What’s your telephone number?</i>


T explains the task to students carefully.
T gives the sub-board with the questions
What time will you leave?


- T gives the students some vocabulary


concerning to the B7.


- Have students practice in pairs.


Have students write the questions and
answers in the books.


-T.gives Ps practice freelỵ


-Encouraging Ps try to speak as much as
possible.


-T. reminds Ps how to use the simple
future tense.


-Asking Ps to write the answer on their
notebooks.


-Explain how to do it this kind of exercise
-Guide the students how to write.


-Let students do free practice.


<b>ANSWER;</b>


.hat,doll, picture,……..
<b>B7</b>


<b> : </b><i><b>Think and write. Imagine</b></i>
<i><b>you will be a guest at Lan’s</b></i>


<i><b>birthday party.</b></i>


<b>Vocabulary:</b>
- a present = a gift
- soft drink


-fruit juice
-orange juice
-milk
-coca-cola...
- sandwich
-hamburger
-bread
<b>ANSWER</b>


a.I’LL give her a new school bag.
b.I’LL go to her house by bike.
c. I’LL play crosswords.


d. I’LL eat cakes and sweets.
e. I’LL drink orang juice.


f.I’LL leave at about eight thirty.


<b>B8</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<b>*Activity1:</b>


<b>*Activity1:</b>



-Advise them to write invitation card.
-Have students reread the invitation card
above.


-Try to write one.


- Help students to write by themselves.
- Ask some students write their


invitation cards on the board.


<b>your birthday party.</b>
<i><b> </b>May 20th</i>
<i>Dear Hoa /</i>


<i> I’m having a party next Sunday, </i>
<i>june 4th.It’s my birthdy.Will you </i>
<i>come with us at my house at sit o’ </i>
<i>clock in thise evening?</i>


<i> I hope you will come and join the </i>
<i>fun. </i>


<i> Your friend.</i>
<i> Tai</i>


<b>V. Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Learn by heart the structure and the vocabulary.



<b>-</b> Do Exercise B4 (T may give some cues for how to do the exercise)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<b> Week 4</b>

<b> Period 12</b>

<i><b>Unit 3</b></i>

:

<i><b>AT HOME</b></i>


<b>A</b>

<b>1</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Describe rooms and homes.
- Make a complaint.


- Make a compliment.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


Simple present


Exclamative sentence


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: awful , comfortable , lovely, modern….
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>



<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity1</b>


<b>Activity2</b>


 <b>Write the things around their house</b>.


 Set the situation, showing a picture of a
house with different rooms, then have
them point out the furniture in the room.


 Have them listen to the dialogue twice.
 Ask students to repeat the dialogue.
 Highlight the structures:


* for complaining: <i>“What an awful day!”</i>


* for complimenting: <i>“What a lovely living</i>
<i>room!”</i>


 Have students practice the dialogue in
pairs, change the roles.


 Mention the different spelling of AmE and
BE between the two words:
favorite/favourite, color/colour.


 Let them read the dialogue silently.



 Have them answer the questions.


- Table. Chair...
...
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


- awful (a)


-comfortable (a)
-lovely (n)


-to be at work
to be shopping
-bright (a)
-favorite (a)
-bathroom (n)
-kitchen (n)
-bedroom (n)
-sink (n)
-tub (n)
-shower (n)
-modern (a)
-amazing (a)


-washing machine (n)
-dryer (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

<b>Activity3</b>


<b>Activity4</b>



 Let them check their answers in pairs.
 Provide the correct answers.


 Ask them to rewrite their answers in the
exercise books as homework.


<i><b>Now answer</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


a) Which rooms do Hoa and Lan talk about?
b) Why does Lan like Hoa’s room?


c) What is in the bathroom?
d) What is in the kitchen?
<i>About you</i>:


e) How many rooms are there in your
house/apartment?


f) What things are there in your
room/kitchen/bathroom?


-dishwasher (n)
-electric stove (n)
-convinient (a)
-water closet (n)
<i><b>Now answer</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


a.The living room,bedroom,
bathroom,and the kitchen.


b. Because it is bright and it has
nice colors; pink and white.
c.A sink, a tub,anda shower.
d. A wasing machine, ...


<b>Consolidation:</b>


Put the words from the box in the right column


I have these things in my


house I don’t have these things in myhouse


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn the structures and vocabulary by heart
- Do Exercise A2, 3 in exercise book page 13
- Prepare period 13 (A2)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

<b>A</b>

<b>2</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Describe rooms and homes.
- Make a complaint.


- Make a compliment.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:



Simple present


Exclamative sentence


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: complaint , compliment , expensive, wet , dry
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Practice</b>
<b>Activity1</b>


<b>Activity2</b>


<b>Fill in the blanks with What, Where, Who, </b>
<b>How</b>


1. …….. is your family name? It’s Nguyen.
2. …….old are you? I’m 12.


3. …….. do you live? On Nguyen Du Street.
4. …….. do you live with? My



 Say some exclamatory sentence.
 Use the examples in the dialogue.


 Explain the structure to express
complains.


 Let them write the complains by
themselves, using the cues in A.


 Ask students to check their exercises in
pairs.


 Provide correct answers.
What an awful restaurant!
What a wet day!


What a boring party!
What a bad movie!


 Let them write the compliments by
themselves, using the cues in B.


 Ask students to check their exercises in
pairs.


 Provide correct answers


<b> Answer:</b>



1. <b>what…?</b>
<b>2. how….?</b>
<b>3. where…?</b>
<b>4. who..?</b>
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


- complaint (n)
- compliment (n)
- expensive (a)
- wet (a)


- dry (a)


- boring (a) = interesting (a)
- deliciuos (a)


<b>Exclamations:</b>


Để biểu lộ sự ngạc nhiên, sự
đau đớn, sự tán thưởng, sự
phàn nàn... về một người nào,
một vật gì hoặc sự vật gì, ta
dùng:


What + (a/an) + adj + noun + (S + V)!


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b>Activity3</b>


What a great party!
What a bright room!



What an interesting movie!
What a lovely house!
What a delicious dinner!
What a beautiful day!


 Ask students to give the structures from
the two examples.


What a picture!


What a beautiful picture!
What nice weather (it is)!
What beautiful eyes (she
has)!


<b>Notes</b>:


Đối với danh từ số nhiều
hoặc danh từ không đếm được
thì ta không dùng mạo từ a/an
trước chúng.


<i><b>Exercise1</b></i>


Write exclamotory sentence


1. This is a very comfortable room.


What...


2. These are modern computers.


What...
3. She is an intelligent girl.


What...
4. That student is excellent.


What ...
5. He’s very friendly.


What...
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn the structures and vocabulary by heart
- Do Exercise A2 in workbook page 13


- Prepare period 14 (A3&A4)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

<b>A</b>

<b>3, 4</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Describe apartments.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


Simple present



Exclamative sentence


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>
<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Practice</b>
<b>Activity1</b>


<b>Activity2</b>


<b>Activity3</b>


<b>Play with words</b>


<b> Writing exclamotory sentence</b>
 This is a very comfortable room.


What...
 These are modern computers.


What...


 She is an intelligent girl.


What...
 That student is excellent.


What ...


 Present prepositions of position.
 Have students look at the pictures.


 Set the scene and have them name the
objects in the picture.


 Show them the prepositions of the objects
in the picture in relation to other objects.
 Ask students about the position of the


objects in the picture.


 Let them work in pairs, point and say the
position of each object.


 Have them change the role.


 Let them ask and answer about the
position of the objects in the picture (in
pairs)


 Let them note the prepositions.



A3


Prepositions:
1. on
2. in
3. under
4. near
5. next to
6. behind
7. in front of
Questions and answer:


 “Is there ...?”


 Yes, there is / No, there isn’t.
 “Are there...?”


 Yes, there are / No, there


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

 Help students how to pronounce and then
students are asked to read in chorus.
<b>Consolidation:</b>


<i><b>Exercise1</b></i>


<b>Put a, an, the, some or any into the gaps</b>


1. My mother does ... housework everyday.
2. Would you like... cup of tea?



3. What... awful day!


4. There aren’t... chairs in this room.
5. What is in... kitchen?


6. There’s... butter in the fridge.
7. I’d like... apple, please.


8. There are... children at the door.
<i><b>Exercise2</b></i>


<b>Multiple choice</b>


1. What... lovely living room!


A. an B. the C. a


2. What... awful day!


A. an B. a C. the


3. We are... work at the moment.


A. on B. in C. at


4. Red is... favorite color.


A. mine B. my C. I


5. There is a refrigerator... the kitchen.



A. at B. in C. on


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn the structures and vocabulary by heart
- Do Exercise A3, A4 in workbook page 14 & 15
- Prepare period 15 (B1)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<b>B</b>

<b>1</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about occupations.
- Describe the apartments.
- Make a compliment.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


Simple present
Wh_questions


Comparisons: Comparatives and superlatives


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: farmer, work, countryside, grow, raise
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>



<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Activiry1</b>


<b>Activiry2</b>


<b>Multiple choice</b>


1.What... lovely living room!


A. an B. the C. a


2.What... awful day!


A. an B. a C. the


3.We are... work at the moment.


A. on B. in C. at


 T asks the students some following
questions:


How are you?



Who do you live with?


What are you? / What’s your job?


What is your father’s job? / What’s your
father?


Where does he do?


 Set the situation, by telling students about
the job and place of work.


 Ask the students about their parent’s jobs
 Let them listen to the dialogue twice.
 Ask them to repeat the dialogue.


 Have students practice the dialogue in
pairs, change the roles.


<b>Vocabulary:</b>
- farmer (n)
- work (v)


- countryside (n)
- grow (v)


- raise (v)
- cattle (n)


- love + V_ing (v)


- younger sister (n)
- photo (n)


* <b>Remember:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

<b>Activiry3</b>


<b>Activiry4</b>


 Highlight the structures for asking about
job and place of work.


“What does your father do?”
“Where does he work?”


 Have some pairs read the dialogue aloud.
 Have them answer the questions.


 Let them check their answers in pairs.
 Provide the correct answers.


 Ask them to rewrite their answers in the
exercise books as homework.


<i><b>Now answer</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


a.What does Hoa’s father do?
b.Where does he work?
c.What is her mother’s job?
d.What does she do every day?



e.Are they happy?


f.How old is Hoa’s sister?


<b>Now answer:</b>
a.He is a farmer.


b. He works on his farm.
c. She is a housewife.


d.She does the housework and
helps on the farm.


e. Yes, they are.(because they
love working on their farm.
f. She is eight.


<b>Consolidation:</b>


<b>Fill in each gap with a suitable preposition</b>
1. Where’s your father?


He’s ... work.


2. We’re talking ... Lan’s family.


3. A farmer works hard ... morning ... night.


4. My mother is a teacher. She works ... a primary school.


5. Mr.Tuan is a journalist. He writes... “Nhan Dan”.


6. There’s a good house ... 27 Hai Ba Trung Street.
7. I found a place ... us to live in Hue.


8. It is the highest building ... the city center.
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn the structures and vocabulary by heart
- Do Exercise A2, 3 in exercise book page 13
- Prepare period 13 (A2)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

<b>B</b>

<b>2, 3, 4</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about occupations.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


Simple present
Wh_questions


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>



<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm upA2</b>.


<b>Presentation</b>
<b>Activiry1</b>
<b>Activiry2</b>
<b>Activiry3</b>
<b>Activiry1 A3</b>
<b>Activiry2</b>
<b>A4</b>
<b>Pre_listening</b>


 <b>Jumble words</b>


 Tell students about Lan’s family: Lan’s
father, Lan’s mother and her brother.
 Have students read the passage.


 Ask students about each person’s job and
place of work, and what he / she does in
his / her job.


 Ask some questions about Lan’s family
and let them answer.


 Have them practice asking and answering
in pairs.



 Have them copy the passage adn write
down the answers.


 Let them learn by heart the passage.


 Guide them how to do this kind of exercise
 Have students do the task individually.
 Ask them to check the answers with their


partners.


 Provide the correct answer.


 Explain how the task will be done.
 Let students read the form.


 Ask students some questions that are
concerning to A4 such as “What’s your
name?” “What’s your age? = How old are


<b>-</b>arfmre: farmer
-ppleeo:………….
-………
<i><b>A2</b></i>


<b>Vocabulary:</b>
- work (v)


- take care of (v)
- sick (a) = ill (a)


- teach (v)


- primary school (comp_n)
- elder brother (n)


- journalist (n)
- write (v)


- newspaper (n)
Remember:


1. What does he/she do?
He / She is a doctor.
2. Where does he/she


work?


He / She works in a
hospital.


<i><b>A3. Match these </b></i>
<i><b>half-sentences.</b></i>


A farmer works on a farm.
A doctor takes care of sick
people.


A journalist writes for a
newspaper.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<b>While_listening</b>


<b>Post_listening</b>


you?” “What’s your job?” “Where do you
work?”


 Have them listen to the recording once
without writing anything


 Ask them to listen to the cassette and fill
in the form with the information they hear.
 Let them listen again and check the


answers.


 T checks some students.


 Let them check their answers in pairs.
 Provide the correct answers.


 Ask them to rewrite their answers in the
exercise books as homework.


<b>Consolidation:</b>


Put the words / phrases from the box in the right places. The first one is done for you.


Who they are Where they work What they do
a doctor in a hospital takes care of sick people



on a farm
a nurse


in a school
for a newspaper
in a hospital


in a studio paints pictures
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn the structures and vocabulary by heart
- Do Exercise A1 in exercise book page 15
- Prepare period 17 (B5, B6)


<b> Week 6 Period 17</b>

<i><b>Unit 3</b></i>

:

<i><b>AT HOME</b></i>



Name: Tom
Age: 26
Job: Teacher


Place of work: at a high
school


Name: Susan
Age: 19


Job: Journalist
Place of work: for a
magazine



Name: Bill
Age: 20
Job: nurse


Place of work: in a hospital


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

<b>B</b>

<b>5, 6.</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Describe rooms and homes.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


Simple present
Comparison


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: apartment , empty, bedroom


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>
<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Activiry1</b>


<b>Activiry2</b>


<b>Activiry3</b>


<b>TeachingB6</b>
<b>Pre_writing</b>


<b>While_writing</b>
<b>Post_writing</b>


 T corrects the exercises B1 in workbook
page 15.


 Set the situation by showing a picture of
two people, then have them point out the
furniture in the room.


 Have them repeat the recording twice.
 Ask students to repeat the dialogue.


 Have students practice the dialogue in
pairs, change the roles.


 Remind students the use of comparatives
and superlatives.


 Mention the notes of:



apartment (AmE) = flat (BE)
apartment house – a block of flats


 Let them read the dialogue silently.
 Have them answer the questions.
 Let them check their answers in pairs.
 Provide the correct answers.


 Ask them to rewrite their answers in the
exercise books as homework.


 Let students read the letter and provide
them further practice on “adjectives”
 Have them reread the letter and fill in the


blanks with given adjectives.
 Let them check the answer.
 Provide the key


 Let the students copy the leter in their
exercise books as homework.


 Have them copy the note in
“REMEMBER”


<b>B5:Listen and read</b>
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


- apartment (n)
- empty (a)


- bedroom (n)


<b>B6:Write</b>


Beautiful, expensive, cheapest,
small, big, best


Remember:
<i>Short adjectives</i>:


One syllable adjectives: hot,
thin, fat...


Two syllable adjectives ending
in


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

Superlative: the + (short adj +
EST)


<i>Long adjectives</i>:


Two or more syllable adjectives:
Beautiful, expensive, stupid...
Comparative: more + long adj
Superlative: the most + long
adjective


<i>Irregular adjectives</i>:


Good/well better


best


Bad / badly worse
little


Little less
least


Many / much more
most


Far farther
farthest


<b>Consolidation:</b>


Put the words / phrases from the box in the right places. The first one is done for you.


Who they are Where they work What they do
a doctor in a hospital takes care of sick people


on a farm
a nurse


in a school
for a newspaper
in a hospital


in a studio paints pictures
<b>Homework:</b>



- Learn the structures and vocabulary by heart
- Do Exercise A1 in exercise book page 15
- Prepare period 17 (B5, B6)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

<b>Language Focus 1</b>





<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Help the students revise all the structures and vocabulary they have already.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


Simple present, present continuous, simple future
Comparison (comparative, superlative)


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>
<b>Presentation</b>
<b>Activiry1</b>


<b>Activiry2</b>
<b>Activiry3</b>
<b>Activiry4</b>
<b>Activiry5</b>
<b>Activiry6</b>


<b>WRITE THE CARDINAL NUBER INTO</b>
<b>ORDINAL</b>


(2) second: (4) fourth:……….
Guide the students to do exercise 1 page 38.
Ps complete in pair.


Ask ps to give the correct answer.
<b>A: is, lives,are,goes:</b>


<b>B: are, eat, rides, catches:</b>


Guide the students to do exercise 2 page 38
Ps complete in pair.


Ask ps to give the correct answer.


<b>* He will do his homework, but he won’t tidy</b>
<b>the yard.</b>


<b>……….</b>


Guide the students to do exercise 3 page 38
(students are asked to write the numbers in your


books).


<b>*first (1): fourth (4): fifth(5): ……….</b>
Guide the students to do exercise 4 page 39
Ps complete in pair.


Ask ps to give the correct answer.


Ask the students to write the sentences with the
cues.


<b>a. It’ under the table.</b>
<b>b. It’in front of the chair.</b>
<b>c. It’ behind the TV.</b>
Guide the students to do exercise 5 page 39.
Ps complete in pair.


Ask ps to give the correct answer.


<b>a. A is a cheap toy: -And B is </b>
<b>cheaper:-But C is the cheapest.</b>


<b>b.</b>


Guide the students to do exercise 6 page 39.
Ps complete in pair.


Ask ps to give the correct answer.


<b>UNIT 3: AT HOME</b>


<b>Period 18: Language Focus 1</b>
<b>TENSES:</b>




<i><b>Present simple tense</b></i>


- Use: Để diễn tả một hànhđộng
thường xảy ra hiện tại.


- Form:


 Đối với tobe: S +
am/is/are


 Đối với động từ thường:
S + V(s/es)


<i><b>Future simple tense</b></i>


- Use: Để diễn tả một hànhđộng
se xảy ra trong tương lai.


- Form: S+ will/shall + bare_inf...
S + will/shall + not +
bare_inf...


Will/Shall+S+ bare_inf...?
<i>Notes</i>: will not = won’t



shall not = shan’t
 Ordinal numbers


 26: twenty – six
 (4): fourth


<b>Prepositions</b>


 Where’s the cat?
 It’s under the table.


<b>Adjectives</b>
<i><b>Short Adj</b></i><b>: </b><i><b> </b></i>


 one syllable adjectives: hot,
thin, fat…


 two syllable adjectives
ending in: Y, OW, ER, ET,
LE


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b>Activiry7</b>


<b>Activiry8</b>


<b>a.He is a fireman.</b>
<b>b. She is adoctor.</b>



Guide the students to do exercise 5 page 39.
Ps complete in pair.


Ask ps to give the correct answer.


<b>a. Are there any books? Yes , there are.</b>
b. <b>Are there any arm chairs? No, there</b>


<b>aren’t.</b>


c. <b>Is there a telephone? No,there isn’t.</b>
Guide them to do exercises.


Ps complete in pair.


Ask ps to give the correct answer.


-what is his name? His name is Pham Trung
<b>Hung.</b>


<b>-How old are you? He is twenty-five.</b>


<b>-What is his address?His address is34…….</b>
<b>-What is his job?He is an office manager.</b>
<b>-What does he do?...</b>
<b>What is he? ………</b>


This ruler is <i>longer</i> <i>than</i>


that one.



<b>Superlative: the + short adj + est</b>
Ex: Who is (tall) person in
your family?


Who is the tallest person
in your family?


<i><b>Long adjectives</b></i>:


 Two or more syllable
adjectives: Beautiful,
expensive, stupid...


<b>Comparative: more + long adj +</b>
than


Ex: She is more beautiful
than her sister.


Superlative: the most + long
adjective


Ex: This apartment is the
most expensive one.


<i><b>* Irregular adjectives</b></i>:


Good/well better the best
Many/much more the most


<b>Vocabulary:</b>


-Fight (v)


-Fire (n)  fireman (n)
-Brave (a)


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn the structures and vocabulary by heart


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

<b> Week 7 Period 19</b>


<b> TEST ENGLISH : 1</b>


<b> TIME : 45’</b>



<b> I. Objectives:</b>


<b> - </b>T can check up and appreciate the knowledge, abilityof the Sts, so t should help Sts know how to
learn and get the knoledge well. They must find the best way to if they are also weak.


- Training pupils four skills: listening, speaking, reading, and writing.


- Students can ask and answer about the wh- questions, talk about their schedule.
<b> II. Language contents:</b>


* <i>Grammar</i>:


- What time is it? = What’s the time? What time do / does + S + bare_inf..?.exlamations /
the present simple, future, comparative.



* <i>Vocabulary</i>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

<b>Week 7 Period 20</b>

<i><b>Unit 4</b></i>

:

<i><b>AT SHOOL</b></i>


<b> A</b>

<b>1, 2, 3</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Training pupils four skills: listening, speaking, reading, and writing.
- Students can ask and answer about the time, talk about their schedule.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


- What time is it? = What’s the time? What time do / does + S + bare_inf..?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


- schedule, physical education.


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>
<b>Presentation</b>



<b>Activiry1</b>


<b>Activiry2</b>


<b>Activiry3</b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Practice</b>


<b>Controlled </b>
<b>Practice</b>


<b>WRITE THE CARDINAL NUMBER</b>


- Teaher introduces A1 by reminding how to
ask and answer about the time which they
have already learnt in the sixth grade.


- Teacher turns on the cassette recorder the
first time and the whole class listen (books
closed)


- Teacher turns on a cassette again and the
whole class repeats each sentence. (T can
ask some students to repeat) and then T
gives the right answer.


T?” “What time does he get up?”...



-Asking the students to make questions


-Teacher asks the students to practice in
<b>pairs or groups.</b>


- T corrects if necessary or helps them to
practice.


- Students practice saying the time of one’s
action with their classmates freely.


<b>EXAMPLE</b>
1. 8: eight:
2. 6: six
3.20: twenty
<b>A1</b>


<b> </b> : <b> </b><i><b>Listen and repeat</b></i>
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


-schedule (n)
*Cách hỏi giờ:


- What time is it?
- What’s the time?
*Cách trả lời:


-Giờ chẳn: It’s + giờ + o’clock.
-Giờ hơn: It’s + phút + past +
giờ.



-Giờ kém: It’s + phút + to + giờ.
- 07:15


- 10:40
- 06:00


- T gives a picture and
asks:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<b>Free Practice</b>


<b>Pre-listening</b>


<b>While-listening</b>


<b>Post-listening . </b>


- Some pairs of students go to the board and
write what they have just practiced with your
friends.


- T asks students to give the remarks and
structures.


*T introduces each picture in A2 by asking the
students some questions: “What does he
do?”


- Set up the situation and explain the task to


the students “There are some small
changes to the schedule on Friday and
Saturday. And now you listen and fill in the
blanks with subjects and times”


- T gives the new vocabulary: <i>physical</i>
<i>education</i> (some explanation about this
word)


- Have students listen to the tape the first
time.


- Let them listen sentence by sentence the
second time. (Students can write the
answers on their books by pencil.


- Listen again and check the result.


- Have students taken a piece of paper and
stick on the board and then T corrects
their mistakes.


- Have them copy in their notebooks.


<i>2) What’s the time?</i>
3) <i>What time does he</i>


<i>do?</i>
<b>A2</b>



<b> </b> : <b> </b><i><b>Answer about you</b><b>.</b></i>
<b> Answer</b>


1. I get up at six.


2.The classes start at seven.
3.They finish at eleven five.
4.I have lunch at twevle.


<b>A3</b>


<b> </b><i><b>Listen and write. </b></i>
<i><b>Vocabulary</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


-Physical education (n)


<b>Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

<b> Week 7 Period 21</b>

<i><b>Unit 4</b></i>

:

<i><b>AT SHOOL</b></i>


<b> A</b>

<b>4, 5.</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about timetable.


- Talk about school subjects.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:



- Present continuous tense
- What time …?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


- schedule, physical education.


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Teaching A5</b>


 <b>Ask students some questions about</b>
<b>the time.</b>



 T pastes pictures on the board, showing at
1st<sub> & 2</sub>nd<sub> picture.</sub>


-Binh is studying geography.


- What time does Lan have her physics
class?


He has her physics class at 8:30.


- What time does Binh have geography?
He has geography at 10:10.


 Practice with the partners following the
model with the rest of the pictures.


 T observes the whole class.<b>Work in</b>
<b>pairs</b>.


 <b>Let some pairs</b> of students practice in
front of the class, and then ask them to
write some sentences.


<i><b>Listen and write</b></i>


 T asks some questions:


<b>Questions:</b>


1.What time do you get up?


2. What time do you have
lunch?


3. What time do you goto bed?


<b>A4. Present continuous tense</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


-How about Hoa? She likes Math because ..
 Let them listen to the dialogue the first


time.


 Have them listen again, and then repeat
after the tape.


 Guide them to find out the vocabulary.
 Let them practice <b>in pairs</b>, the change of


<b>role.</b>


 Have some <b>pairs of students</b> role-play
the dialogue before the class.


 Ask students to write their schedule in the


exercise notebook.


 Ask one another about the schedule of the
class.


 Remind the school subjects.


<b>A5 listen and write</b>
<i><b>Vocabulary</b></i><b>:</b>


-interesting (a)
-important (a)
-subject (n)


-favorite subject (n)
-difficult (a) easy (a)
-fun (n)


<i><b>Note</b></i><b>: Preposition of time</b>
- On + thứ, ngày
- At + giờ


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn the structures and vocabulary by heart
- Do Exercise A3 in workbook page 22


- Prepare period 22 (A6&A7)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<b> A</b>

<b>6, 7.</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about timetable.


- Talk about school subjects.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


- Present continuous tense
- What time …?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


- schedule, physical education.


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>


<b>Pre-reading</b>


<b>While-reading</b>



<b>Post -reading</b>


<b>Teaching A7</b>


 <b>Ask students some questions about</b>
<b>the schedule . </b>


 Read through the passage.


 Ask students to find the differences
between schools in the USA and schools
in VietNam while reading the passage.
 Explain some new words.


* Ask STS to read the passage individually.
 Have two students read the 2 paragraphs


before the class.


 Let them do the “True/False” exercises <b>in</b>
<b>pair.</b>


 Provide the key and check students’
comprehension.


 <b>Let some pairs</b> of students practice in
front of the class, and then ask them to
write some sentences.


<i><b>Questions: True or False? Check the </b></i>


<i><b>boxes</b></i>


1) Students do not usually wear school uniform.


<b>1. when do you have English?</b>
<b>2. when do you have Math?</b>
<b>3. when do you have History?</b>
<b>A6 : Read</b>


<i><b>Vocabulary</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>
-uniform (n)
-break (n)


- take a break two 20 – minute
breaks.


-school cafeteria (n)
-snack (n)


-popular (a)
-baseball (n)
-activity (n)


after school activities
-basketball (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

2) There are classes on Saturday morning.
3) Students don’t have a break in the afternoon.
4) The school cafeteria sells food to students.
5) The school cafeteria only opens at lunchtime.


6) Basket is unpopular after school activity.
 T guides the students to read in chorus


and then practice with their partners. T
encourages them to learn by heart “play
with words”.


<b>Consolidation:</b>


Match up the two halves in column A and column B, then write meaningful sentences.


A B


In literature


In home economics
In history


In geography


I study the world, its rivers, and its
mountain ranges.


I study the past and how the world
changes.


I read a book and write about what I read.
I learn to cook and what our bodies need.
<b>Homework:</b>



- Learn the structures and vocabulary by heart
- Do Exercise A4 in workbook page 23


- Prepare period 23 (B1)


<b> Week 8</b>

<b> Period 23</b>

<i><b>Unit 4</b></i>

:

<i><b>AT SHOOL</b></i>


<b>B</b>

<b>1.</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

<b>-</b> Pupils can know some books : science books, reference books
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


Where ……….?
What time …………..?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


Racks, science books, chemistry, biology, dictionary, at the


<i><b> back of, </b>Reader, novels, reference book, follow, library, Librarian</i>
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>



<b>Warm up </b>


<b>Presentation</b>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Chatting</b>


<b>T: What’s this?</b>
<b>Ps: It’s a library</b>


<b>T: What can you see in the library?</b>
<b>Ps: books, dictionaries, reference </b>
<b>books……</b>


<b>T: today, we will go to a library.</b>
T: gives them some new words.


Ps: copy them down and repeat the new
.words after the teacher.


Ps: read the new words again.
T: corrects their mistakes if any.


T: play the tapes (books closed).
Ps: listen to the tape twice.


T: pauses each sentence.
Ps: repeat after the tape.


Ps: try to understand the information
T: asks students to repeat the dialogue
after the teacher.


T: corrects their mistakes if any.


<b> B 1 THE LIBRARY</b>


<b>Vocabulary</b>
-library (n)
-librarian (n)


-reference books (n)
-dictionary (n)


-chemistry (n)
-reader (n)
-novel (n)
-rack (n)


<b>H i v n i làm vi c c a ai óỏ ề ơ</b> <b>ệ</b> <b>ủ</b> <b>đ</b>
<b>Where does he/ she work?</b>


<i><b>Trả lời:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

Ps: read the dialogue <b>in pairs ( 4 pairs)</b>
Ps: have to answer the questions<b>.Work </b>


<b>in pairs or groups to answer the </b>
<b>questions.</b>


1. Where are the magazines?
2. Where are the newspapers?
3. What books are on the left?
4. What books are on the right?
5. Where are the books in English?
6. What time does the library open?
7. What time does it close?


<i><b>Keys.</b></i>


<i>1.The magazines are on the racks.</i>
<i>2.The newspapers are on the racks</i>
<i>3.The math and science books are on </i>
<i>the shelves on the left.</i>


<i>4.the history, geography books, </i>
<i>dictionaries and literature in </i>


<i>Vietnamese are on the shelves on the </i>
<i>right.</i>


<i>5.The books in English are at the back </i>
<i>of the library.</i>


<i>6.the library opens at 7.am</i>
<i>7.The library closes at 4:30 pm. </i>
<b>Homework:</b>



<b>-</b> learn new words by heart


<b>-</b> practice their reading


- Prepare B2, B3 for the next period.


<b> Week 8 Period 24</b>

<i><b>Unit 4</b></i>

:

<i><b>AT SHOOL</b></i>


<b>B</b>

<b>2, 3.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

<b>-</b> Pupils can know something about their library.


<b>-</b> Pupils can know some books : science books, reference books
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Where ……….? What time …………..?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


<i>In the middle - welcome</i>


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up </b>



<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Multiple choice</b>


1.What... lovely living room!
A. an B. the C. a


2.What... awful day!
A. an B. a C. the


3.We are... work at the moment.
A. on B. in C. at


4.Red is... favorite color.
A. mine B. my C. I


5.There is a refrigerator... the kitchen.
A. at B. in C. on


T: Today, Nga goes to the library. She meets
the librarian. What can she want to borrow?
We will listen to the tape.


T: gives them some new words.


Ps: copy them down and repeat the new


words after the teacher.


Ps: read the new words again.
T: corrects their mistakes if any.


T: play the tapes (books closed).
Ps: listen to the tape twice.
T: pauses each sentence.
Ps: repeat after the tape.


Ps: try to understand the information.


T: asks students to repeat the dialogue after
the teacher.


<b>ANSWER;</b>
1. A ;2……..
<b>B. THE LIBRARY</b>
<b>-Vocabulary</b>


-in the middle
-welcome (adj)


<i><b>Answer</b></i>


1. study area
2. Science + math
3. Geography


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<b>Activity 3</b>



<b>Teaching B3</b>
<b> Prelistenin</b>


<b> While -listening</b>


<b> Post listening</b>


T: corrects their mistakes if any.


Ps: read the dialogue in pairs ( <b>4 pairs)</b>
Ps: have to answer the questions.
1. What does Nga want?


2.Where are the math books?


T: What is this? ( points at the picture)
Ps: This is a library.


T: what can you find in the library?
Ps: math books, reference books……


*T: today, someone wants to tidy the library,
but they don’t know where they put the books.
Listen to the tape and help them to arrange.
T: plays the tape twice.


Ps: listen and take note <b>in group.</b>
T: pauses each sentence.



Ps: writes the name of the books and the
positions that they can hear.


Ps: <b>each group</b> have their own answers.
Ps: go to the board and write their answer.
T: corrects their mistakes if any.


magazines
6+7 English


8. Librarian’s desk.


<b>Homework:</b>


- learn new words by heart -Practice their reading
- Prepare B4+B5 for the next period.


<b> Week 9 Period 25</b>

<i><b>Unit 4</b></i>

:

<i><b>AT SHOOL</b></i>


<b>B</b>

<b>4, 5.</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b>II. Language contents:</b>
* Grammar:


Review the question word : Why – Where – How long


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:



<i>Congress, Washington D.C, receive, contain, million, employee</i>
<i> III. Techniques: </i>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> Warm up </b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Chatting</b>


1. How many days do you go to school?
2. What time do you go to school?


T: asks students if they know any public
libraries in HCM city or any famous libraries in
the world.


T: has them look at the photo and guess what
it is.



T: this is one of the world’s largest libraries.
T: why? We will come to the new lesson
today.


T: gives them some new words.
T: reads new words.


Ps: repeat new words after the teacher.
T: corrects their mistake if any.


T: plays the tape.
Ps: listen.


T: pauses each sentence.
Ps: read.


Ps: read the text ( 5 pupils).
T: corrects their mistakes if any.


T: asks them to answer the question below


<b> B. THE LIBRARY</b>
<b>B4+ B5</b>


<b>Vocabulary</b>
-Congress (n)


The Library of Congress (n)
-receive (V)



-copies (n)
-contain (v)
-employee (n)


<b>Key</b>


1. It’s in Washington D.C, (the
capital of the USA)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<b> TeachingB5:</b>
<b>Playwith words</b>


<b>Consolidation</b>


the text. ( <b>works in pairs).</b>


1. Where is the Library of Congress?
2. How many books does it have?
3. How long are its shelves?
4. How many people work there?
5. Why is it so large?


T: plays the tape..


T: presents them some new words.
PS: read new words after the teacher.
Ps: listen and repeat.


T: divides the class into <b>two groups.</b>
Ps: read .



T: correct their mistakes if any.


* Asks them to tell about their school library
basing on these questions: ( <b>works in pairs).</b>
1. Where is your library?


2. How many books does it have? (1000)
3. How long are its shelves?(10m)


4. How many people work there?(1)
5. Who is the librarian? (Mrs HUE)


shelves


4. Over 5000 people work
there.


5. Because it receives copies
of all American books.


<i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>
<i>-Wonderful (adj)</i>
<i>-forget</i>


<i>-myself</i>
<i>-rocket (n)</i>
<i>-space</i>
<i>-adventure</i>



<i>1. It’s inPCT secondary school.</i>
<i>2. It has about 1000 books</i>
<i>3. It’s about ten meters</i>
<i>4. There is one</i>


<i>5. Mrs Hue is the librarian</i>


<b>Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> learn new words by heart , practice their reading


<b>-</b> write a message about their school library
- Prepare Unit 5 (A1) for the next period.

<b> </b>



<b> Week 9 Period 26</b>

<i><b>Unit 5</b></i>

:

<i><b>WORK AND PLAY</b></i>



<b>A</b>

<b>1.</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Pupils can talk about their school subjects


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

* Grammar:


Simple Present tense.


What do you study in ………..? What do he/ she study in …………..? What’s one’s favorite class?


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:



<i>-how to……,. use, computer, Computer Science class, be interested in, Map, experiments</i>
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> Warm up</b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Chatting</b>


1<b>. How many days do you go to school?</b>
<b>2. What time do you go to school?</b>
<b>3. What time do classes begin?</b>
<b>4. How many subjects do you study</b>?


T: lets them look at the pictures .


T: reviews names of the school subjects.
Ps: elicit what they learn in each subjects.



T: plays the tape ( books closed).
Ps: listen and recognize the subjects.
Ps : listen again ( book opened).
Class, learn how to ……….


Ps: Read and find out the new words in pair.
-read new words after the teacher.


T: has them listen to the tape again.
Ps: read the text ( <b>5 –6 pupils</b>)
T: corrects their mistakes if any.
Ps: read the text again.


Ps: read the questions and the answer.


P1: What does Mai study in her Geography
class?


P2: She studies maps and learns


<b> Answer:</b>


<b>1.I go to school six days.</b>
<b>2. I go to school at 6.30.</b>
<b>A1 Litsenand read</b>


 <b>Vocabular</b>


<b>y</b>



-Learn how to …..(prep)
learn how to write
-use (v)


-Computer Science class(n)
-Be interested in ……
-experiments (n)


H i ai đó h c gì trong ti t h c nào?ỏ ọ ế ọ
What does he/she/Mai
study in …?


<i><b>Trả lời</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<b>Activity 4</b>


about………


P1: What are Mai’s favorite subjects?
P2: Her favorite class is ………


T: Who knows more information about Mai?
Ps: try to make 5 five questions about Mai to
their friends.


Ps: <b>works in pairs.</b>


<b>*Some questions may be:</b>



1. What does Mai study in her Computer
Science class?


2. What does Mai study in her Physics class?
3. Which grade is she in?


4. What time does her class start?
5. What time does her classes finish?


Ps: some pairs stand in front of the class to
make a conversation.


Keys


<i>1.She studies/ learns how to</i>
<i>use a computer</i>


<i>2.She does some experiments</i>
<i>3. She is in grade 7</i>


<i>4. Her classes start at seven</i>
<i>o’clock</i>


<i>5. Her classes finished at a</i>
<i>quarter past eleven.</i>


<b>Homework:</b>


- learn new words by heart .
- practice their reading.



- Prepare A2, A3 for the next period..


<b> Week 9 Period 27</b>

<i><b>Unit 5</b></i>

:

<i><b>WORK AND PLAY</b></i>



<b>A</b>

<b>2, 3.</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Pupils can talk about their school subjects


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

* Grammar:


Simple Present tense.


Which subject ……….? She’s good at ……. I’m good at ……….


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


Enjoy, Electronics, repair, household appliances, fix, be good at, guitar, art club, artist.
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> Warm up</b>


<b>Pre-reading</b>



<b>While-reading</b>


<b>They tell about the subjects they learn</b>
<b>and their favorite subjects.</b>


<b>* Math, History…..I like English best.</b>


T: This is Ba. What’s he doing?(Ps: can
answer the question in Vietnamese).


T: What’s his favorite subject?


Ps: His favorite subject is Electronics


(Ps: can answer the questions in Vietnamese)
T: plays the tape.


Ps: try to get some information.
Ps: listen to the tape again.
Ps: find out some new words.
T: presents some new words.


Ps: read new words after the teacher.
Ps: read the passage <b>( 5 pupils).</b>
T: corrects their mistakes if any.
Ps: know some main ideas about Ba
Ps: have to answer some questions:
1. Which subject does Ba like best?
(What’s Ba’s favorite subject?)



2. Does Ba like other subjects at school?
Write the sentence that tells you this.
3. What does he learn to do in Electronics?
4. How does this subject help Ba?


5. Is Ba good at drawing? Write the sentence


<b> Answer:</b>


<b>*Math,History….</b>
<b> - I like English best.</b>
<b>A2 + A3</b>


 <b>Vocabular</b>


y


-enjoy (v)
-Electronics (n)
-repair (v)


-household appliances
-fix (v)


-be good at (v)
I’m good at English
-play the guitar (v)
-artist (n)



-art (n)
<i><b>eys</b></i>


1. Ba likes Electronics best
2. Yes, he does. He enjoys


school very much


3. He learns how to repair
household appliances


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<b>Post-reading</b>


that tells you this.
T: Do you like math?
Ps: yes/ No


T: Is it difficult or easy?
Ps: answer.


T: we are going to hear the dialogue between
Lan and Hoa. They are solving a math.


You will listen to the dialogue. Then answer.
the question “How much does it cost?”


Ps: read the dialogues in silence.
Ps: find out some new words.


Ps: read new words after the teacher.


Ps: read the dialogue <b>in pairs ( 3 pairs).</b>
Ps: answer the question: “How much does
one banana cost?”


Ps: read the dialogue in silence again <b>(work</b>
<b>in pairs) .</b>


5. Yes, he is. His drawings are
very good.


<i>Vocabulary</i>
<i>-price(n)</i>
<i>-cost (v)</i>
<i>-problem (n)</i>
<i>-erase (v)</i>
<i><b>Keys</b></i>


<i> One banana costs 600 dong</i>


<b>Homework</b>


- learn new words by heart, practice their reading
- answer the questions in A2


- Prepare Unit 5 (A4, A5, and A6) for the next period.


<b>Week 10 Period 28</b>

<i><b>Unit 5</b></i>

:

<i><b>WORK AND PLAY</b></i>



<b> A</b>

<b>4, 5, 6,7.</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Pupils can know some school subjects
- Pupils can practice their listening


- Pupils can know what they learn in each subject
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

Simple Present tense.


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: -technology , class activities , instead ……..
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> warm up</b>


<b> Pre-listening</b>


<b>While-listening:</b>


<b>Post-listening:</b>


<b> Teaching A5</b>
<b> Pre - reading</b>


<b>BRAINSTORMING</b>



<b>-Draw the circle with an example. Divite</b>
<b>the class into two groups. Write the</b>
<b>subjects.</b>


T introduces A4 (p54).


T: Can you guess what subjects Ba and Hoa
do on Saturday morning?


T: listen to the tape for the first time.


Ps: name the subject that Hoa and Ba learn
on Saturday morning.


Ps: listen for the second time and mach the
letter a, b, c, d, e (works in pair).


Ps: change their paper.
T: corrects their mistakes.
T: gives the correct answers.
(keys : Ba d, a, e. Hoa c, b, e).


T: How many subjects do you study at
school?


T: what do you study in each subject?
T: which subject do you like best?
(PS can answer in Vietnamese)



T: today we read a passage that tell you
some subjects.


Ps: read the passage in silence to find out
some main ideas.


T: gives them some new words.


Ps: repeat the new words after the teacher.
Ps: read the passage.


<b> </b>
<b> History</b>


<b> SUBJECTS</b>
- English
- Math


<b>A. IN CLASS</b>
<b>A4 + A5 + A6+ A7</b>


 <b>Vocabular</b>


<b>y</b>


-technology (n)
-class activities (n)
-instead :


-essay (n)


-present (adj)
-event (n)


-Language class (n) such as:
-author (n)


-temperature(n)
-songbook (n)
-graphs (n)
-equation (n)
- calculator (n)
- running shoes (n)
-globe (n)


-atlas (n)
Keys


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

<b> While - reading</b>


<b> Post reading</b>


Ps: look at the part : “ Now discuss with a
partner”.


Ps: choose the words which are related to the
subject. ( they will odd one out).


T: gives them some new words.
Ps: do the exercise <b>in pair.</b>



Ps: look at the book (p55).


T: asks pupils to try to guess the meaning of
the vocabulary.


T: gives them some new vocabulary if
necessary.


Ps: match.


- literature <b>- paintings</b>


- History – <b>basketball games</b>.
- science <b>- preposition</b>


- English <b>- England</b>
<i><b>Keys</b></i>


Physical education – games,
running shoes, ball


Geography – map – globe, atlas
Music – Piano, guitar,
songbooks


Art – paint, pencils, paper.
Math – graphs, equations,
calculator.


<b>Homework</b>



<b>-</b> learn new words by heart


<b>-</b> practice their reading


- Prepare Unit 5 B1 for the next period.


<b>Week 10 Period 29</b>

<i><b>Unit 5</b></i>

:

<i><b>WORK AND PLAY</b></i>



<b> B</b>

<b>1</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Pupils can know some school subjects
- Pupils can practice their listening


- Pupils can know what they learn in each subject
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


hard, recess, bell, ring, yard, excited, chat, blindman’s bluff, catch, play marble, skip rope, go indoor
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>



<b> Warm –up</b>


<b>Presentation</b>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Activity 4</b>


<b>CHATTING</b>


<b>T asks Ps some questions.</b>
<b>Sts answer.</b>


T: asks students to look at the book.
Ps: listen.


Ps: listen and repeat.
Ps: read the part in pairs<b>.</b>
Ps: look at the picture.
T: where are the children?
T: what are they doing?
Ps: they are playing games.


T: when do they usually do these games?
Ps: at recess.



Today, we are going to hear the tape
describing various after – school activities at
a recess.


T: plays the tape .


Ps: listen ( books closed).


Ps: listen the tape again ( book opened).
Ps: find out some new words.


Ps: repeat new words after the teacher.
Ps: read the passage again.


Ps: try to understand the main ideas of the
passage.


T: correct their mistakes if any.


Ps: tell the formation of the present
continuous tense.


T: corrects their mistake if any.


<b>T: what subject do you like</b>
<b>best?</b>


<b>Ps: I likes History, Math….</b>
<b> T: How do you go to</b>
<b>school?</b>



<b> PS: I go to school on foot</b>.
<b> B. IT’S TIME FOR RECESS</b>
<b> B1 </b>


 <b>Vocabular</b>


<b>y</b>
- bell (n)
-yard (n)
-recess (n)
-chat (n)


-blind man’s bluff (n)
-catch (n)


-play marbles (v)
-skip rope (v)
-go indoors (v)


<i><b>* Present continuous tense</b>.<b> </b></i>
<i>What are you doing?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<b>Consolidation</b>


Ps: look at the passage again.


Ps: ask and answer in pairs with the cue:
A: What is the boy doing?



B: He’s playing catch.


A: What are the children doing?
B: They are talking.


Ps; answer the question <b>in pair.</b>
1. What do you usually do at recess?


* Ask sts to put the adverbs in the correct
order <b>in group</b>.


1. I go to the English club (often).
2. They play catch at recess (usually).
3. The yard is noisy at recess ( always).
4. What do you do at recess? (often).
5. Does she skip rope at recess? (always).


<i><b>Keys</b></i>


<i>1. I usually ……….at</i>
<i>recess</i>


<i>2. Yes, I do</i>


<i>3. I usually …………after</i>
<i>school</i>


1.. I often go to the English club
2. They usually play catch at
recess



3. The yard is always noisy at
recess


4. What do you often do at
recess? 5. Does she always
skip rope at recess?


<b>Homework</b>


<b>-</b> Learn new words by heart


<b>-</b> Practice their reading


<b>-</b> Prepare Unit 5 (B2, B4) for the next period.


<b> </b>



<b> Week 10 Period 30</b>

<i><b>Unit 5</b></i>

:

<i><b>WORK AND PLAY</b></i>



<b>B</b>

<b>2, 4</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Pupils can know some activities at recess
- Pupils can practice their listening


- Pupils can know what they learn in each subject
<b>II. Language contents:</b>



* Grammar:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: Crowded


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> Warm up</b>
<b>Presentation</b>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>B4 Take a survey</b>
<b>Warm up</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>NET WORK</b>


<b>-Draw the circle with an example. Divite</b>
<b>the class into two groups. Write the</b>
<b>Activities at recess.</b>



T: looks at your book.


Ps: find out some activities at recess.
T: correct their mistakes if any.


T: you will hear the tape about Mai, Kien, Lan,
and Ba. They are at the recess. Now you
listen to the tape and decide which games
each student plays by matching the names on
the left column with the activities on the right
one.


Ps: <b>work in pairs.</b>


Ps: listen to the name ( for the first time)
Ps: listen to some activities at recess.
Ps: change their papers to their friends.
T: correct their answers if any.


Ps: complete their matching exercises.
T: What do you usually at recess?
T: Are you happy at your recess?
T: Do you play catch at recess?


T: I have to take a survey. Now all of you


CHATTING


<b> ACTIVITIES AT RECESS</b>
-skipping rope.



-reading.


<b>B. IT’S TIME FOR RECESS</b>
<b>B2 + B4</b>


 <b>Vocabular</b>


<b>y</b>


Crowded (adj)
Keys


<i>Mai is playing catch</i>


<i>Kiên is playing blind man’s bluff</i>
<i>Lan is skipping rope</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Homework</b>


have to take some survey.


Ps: draw a table ( prepared at home).


Ps: use some questions to take a survey with
their friends ( 3 friends).


1. What do you usually do at recess?


2. Do you play soccer?


3. Do you kip rope?
4. Do you skip rope?


Ps: ask and answer in pair.
Ps: complete the survey.
Ps: read their survey.


*Learn new words by heart
- Practice their reading


- Prepare Unit 5 (B3 + B5) for the next
period.


<b>Week 11 Period 31</b>

<i><b>Unit 5</b></i>

:

<i><b>WORK AND PLAY</b></i>



<b> B</b>

<b>3,5</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Pupils can know some activities of American pupils.
- Pupils can practice their reading.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>
* Grammar:


Present Continuous tense.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

Energetic, pen pal, portable, swap, Junior high school, senior high school, take part in, score goals,


earphone, comic, join in, CD player, shooting some hoops.


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> Warm up</b>


<b>Presentation</b>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>*Teaching B5</b>
<b>play with words</b>


<b>Consolidation</b>


<b>CHATTING</b>


<b>T: Can you tell me the names of activities</b>
<b>at recess?</b>


T: today we will know some activities of
American pupils at recess.



Ps: look at the passage and find out some
activities


T: presents new words on the board
Ps: repeat them after the teacher


Ps: look at all the passage and find out the
main ideas


T: helps them understand the meaning of the
difficult words


T: presents some new words
Ps: read the passage again
T: corrects their mistakes if any


T: asks them to tell the meaning of the
passage in Vietnamese


Ps: read the passage again


Ps: answer the questions <b>in pairs</b>


Ps: choose the correct letters (a, b, c or d)
Ps: pupil in each pair reads their answer and
the others remark


T: gives them the correct answer
T: plays the tape



Ps: listen and repeat after the tape
Ps: find out new words


<b>Ps: blind man’s bluff, catch,</b>
<b>skips rope…..</b>


<b>T” What do you usually do at</b>
<b>recess?</b>


<b>Ps: I usually play marbles…..</b>
<b> B. IT’S TIME FOR RECESS</b>
<b>B3 + B5</b>


 <b>Vocabular</b>


<b>y</b>


<i>-Pen pal (n)</i>


<i>-Junior high school (n)</i>
<i>- take part in (v)</i>


<i>-energetic (adj)</i>
<i>- score goals (v)</i>


<i>-shooting some hoops (n)</i>
<i>-portable (adj)</i>


<i>-CD player (n)</i>


<i>- earphone (n)</i>
<i>-at the same time</i>
<i>-swap (v)</i>


<i>- baseball card (n)</i>
<i>- packets of candy</i>
<i>- relaxing (n)</i>
<i>-common way (n)</i>
<b>Keys</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

Ps: read new words after the teacher
Ps: read the passage <b>in pairs or group.</b>
T: asks them to complete the table


American
school


Vietnamese
school
Play marbles


Baseball
card
Eating
Talking
Skip rope
Listen to
music


<i>an American school</i>



<i>b. “……….they never have</i>
<i>time to play a whole game”.</i>
<i>This means recess is short</i>
<i>c. Baseball card are popular</i>


<i>with mostly boys</i>


<i>d. Eating and talking with</i>
<i>friends are popular activities</i>
<i>worldwide</i>


<b>Homework</b>


<b>-</b> learn new words by heart


<b>-</b> practice their reading


<b>-</b> do exercise 3 page 32.


- prepare A1 for the next period


<b>Week 11 Period 32 </b>

<i><b>Unit 6</b></i>

:

<i><b>AFTER SCHOOL</b></i>



<b>A</b>

<b>1</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Pupils will know the adverbs of frequency: usually, often, sometimes
- Pupils will know the way to make comparative sentences



<b>II. Language contents:</b>
* Grammar:


- Simple present tense
<i><b>- Present continuous tense</b></i>


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> Warm up</b>
<b>Presentation</b>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Consolidation</b>


<b> BRAIN STORMING</b>


<b>-Draw the circle with an example. Divite</b>
<b>the class into two groups. Write the</b>
<b>Activities afetr school.</b>



T introduces the new lession.You will hear
a conversation between Minh and Hoa.
They are talking about their after school
activities.


T: plays the tape


Ps: listen (books closed)


Ps: listen again (books opened)


Ps: look at the passage and try to
understand the passage


T: gives them the meaning of the difficult
words


Ps: repeat them after the teacher


Ps: repeat sentence by sentence after the
tape.


T: corrects their mistakes if any


Ps: read the passage <b>in pairs (6 pairs)</b>
T: chooses <b>the best pairs</b> to read in front
of the class


Ps: read



T: asks them to answer the questions to
check their understanding


<b>* true (T) or false (F)?</b>
1. Tomorrow isn’t Sunday (F)


2. Minh doesn’t usually meet his friends (F)
3. Minh and Hoa need more players (T)
4. Ba enjoys playing volleyball.(F)
5. They go to the movie on Sunday (F)


<b> SWIMMING</b>
<b> ACTIVITIES AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


-skipping rope. –Playing football
-reading.


<b>WHAT DO YOU DO?</b>


<b>A1Listen . Then practice with a</b>
<b>partner.</b>


<b>*Vocabulary</b>
<i>-relax (v)</i>
<i>-should (v)</i>
<i>-practice (v)</i>
<i>-gether </i>
<i>-school team</i>
<i>-player (n)</i>



<i><b>Keys</b></i>


<i>1.She is doing her math homework.</i>
<i>2.They are going to get a cold drink in</i>
<i>the cafeteria.</i>


<i>3.He is in the music room.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

<b>Homework</b>


6. Minh practices music everyday after
school (T)


*Learn new words by heart, practice their
reading.


-Write your activities after school.
- Prepare A2 + A5 for the next period


<b>Week 11 Period 33</b>

<i><b>Unit 6</b></i>

:

<i><b>AFTER SCHOOL</b></i>



<b> A</b>

<b>2,5</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Pupils will know the adverbs of frequency : usually, often, sometimes
- Pupils will know the way to make comparative sentences


<b> II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


<i><b>-Adverb of frequency ,Simple present tense ,Present continuous tense</b></i>


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> </b>


<b> Warm up</b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b> Activity 1 </b>


<b> Activity 2 </b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Activity 4</b>


<b>BRAIN STORMING</b>


<b>-Draw the circle with an example. Divite</b>


<b>the class into two groups. Write the</b>
<b>Activities afetr school.</b>


T asks and Students answer (the content of
the previous lesson)


<b>A. </b><i><b>Label the pictures</b></i>


T: can you tell me the name of the activities?
Ps: answer: play soccer, play volleyball…
T: hangs some pictures on the board.
Ps: name the picture.<b>Work in pair.</b>


T: corrects their mistakes and present the
new activity: swimming in the pool.


Ps: repeat new words after the teacher
<b>B. </b><i><b>Ask and answer</b>:<b> </b></i>


T reminds how to use the adverbs of
frequency. (usually, sometimes, often,
always, never).


T asks questions “What do you usually do
after school?”


Let them answer; use the adverbs from the
box.


*Have them practice asking and answering in


<b>pairs</b>, alternating roles.


Call on some <b>pairs t</b>o ask and answer the


<b> SWIMMING</b>


<b> ACTIVITIES AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


-skipping rope. –Playing football
-reading.


<b>WHAT DO YOU DO?</b>
<b>A2 + A5</b>


 <b>Vocabular</b>


<b>y</b>


-swim in the pool
-play computer games
-to be tired of + V_ing
-jump (v)


-keep fit (v)
-healthy (a)
-body (n)
-mind (n)
<b>Answer</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

questions in front of the class.
-Guide the whole class to read.
<i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b>:</b>


<b>Put the adverbs of frequency in brackets into the right places</b>
1. Ba is interested in stamps. (always)


2. Nga learns how to play the guitar. (never)


3. Nam, Ba and Hoa are late for their class. (sometimes)
4. After class, Nam goes home and watches videos. (usually)
5. Are you free in the evening? (often)


<b>Homework:</b>


Remember to learn vocabulary and structures by heart.
Be sure to do exercise A1, A2 in workbook 33


Prepare A3, A4 at home.


<b>Week 12 Period 34</b>

<i><b>Unit 6</b></i>

:

<i><b>AFTER SCHOOL</b></i>



<b> A</b>

<b>3,4,5.</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>Through the pictures, pupils look at and can guess what the children are doing. We can help
the pupils join and like the activities after school hours.


-Training the pupils listening skill: listening and recognizing some certain information about activities after
school hours.



-Pupils can choose useful activities in pastime.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar *Revision the position of adverb of frequency: sometimes, never, usually.
*Introducing if clause in conditional sentence.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> </b>


<b> Warm up</b>


<i><b>Pre-reading</b></i>


<i><b>While-reading</b></i>


<i><b>Post-Reading</b></i>


<b>Teaching A4</b>
<b> Pre - listening</b>


<b> While - listening</b>


<b>BRAIN STORMING</b>



<b>-Draw the circle with an example. Divite the </b>
<b>class into two groups. Write the Activities afetr</b>
<b>school.</b>


- T gives the first picture,introduce, ask ps:
<i>This is Nga. Can you guess what she is doing?</i>
<i> (P answer)</i>


- T gives the second picture:


This is Ba. What is he doing? (P answer)
- T gives the third picture:


<i>This is Nam. What is he doing? Where is he?</i>
<i> (P answer)</i>


 Listen to the tape:


Listen the first time (books closed)
Listen the second time (books open)
*(1 minute) for reading in silence.


-Finding out new word read after teacher.
-Asking Ps to read the paragraphs. T asks the
first question (P answer)


What is Nga’s theatre group doing?
-Pupils ask and answer (<b>work in group)</b>
-Checking some <b>pairs of group</b>.



“What is the text about?” T asks the pupils to
name the title of the text. (<b>ACTIVITIES AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL OR OUR PASTIME.)</b>


T and pupils discuss what they usually do after
school.


-T gives the sub-board.
Mai   go to the circus


PLAYING CHESS
<b> ACTIVITIES AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


-skipping rope. –Playing
football


-reading.


<b>WHAT DO YOU DO?</b>
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


-Rehearse a play
-Theatre group
-Acting (n)
-If…: nếu ... thì
-Stamp collector


-Stamp collector’s club


-The president of the stamp
collector’s club


Lie (v)
-Pastime (n)


-The school anniversary
celebration


-Sporty (adj)
-Comic (n)
<b>ANSWER A3</b>


a. Her group is rehearsing for
the….anniversary celeblation.
b.He gets Amerivan stamps….
c.The stamp ……..


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<b> Post-listening</b>


<i><b>Homework</b></i>


Nam   go to the school cafeteria
Ba   watch a movie


Lan   tidy the room
Kien   rehearse a play


 Play the cassette. T opens the tape 2
times. Pupils match.



 The third time of listening, T helps Pupils to
correct.


*Read the text and answer the questions again.
-Do exercise A3, A4 Page34-35 in exercise book.


-Prepare B1 (period 35)


<b>ANSWER A4</b>


Mai   go to the school
cafeteria


Nam   rehearse a play
Ba   go to the circus
Lan   watch a movie
Kien   tidy the classroom


<b> Week 12 Period 35</b>

<i><b>Unit 6</b></i>

:

<i><b>AFTER SCHOOL</b></i>



<b>B</b>

<b>1</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>-Talking about some activities after school. Giving some suggestions or invitations.
 Agreeing or refusing the invitations.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>
* Grammar:



Review suggestions: Let’s …Why don’t …? What about …?
 New grammar: Should / Shouldn’t + bare_inf


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b> Activity 1 </b>


<b> Activity 2 </b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


 <b>CHATTING</b>


 <b>T asks Ps some questions</b>


 T hangs the pictureand introduce the new
lesson.


T asks Ps:


 What’s Nam going to do this evening?
 What is Ba going to do?



 What is Lan going to do?
 What is Hoa going to do?


 How about Ba? What about Lan?
 T asks Ps to listen to the tape.


 The first time (books closed)
 The second time (books open)


 The third time. Ps listen and repeat


each sentence.


 T introduces some new words
(assignments)


 T asks Ps to practice reading in <b>groups</b> of


4 (in 5 minutes)


 Checking <b>some of group</b> before class.
 T asks some questions. Ps answer.


 Ps practice reading and answering in


<b>pairs.</b>


 <b>questions</b>


What will you do tonight?


(Ps answer)


Are you going to see the movie?
(Ps answer)


<b>LET’S GO</b>
<i><b>Vocabulary</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>
<b>-</b>assignments (n)
-come on (expr) nào


-It’ll be fun (expr) se vui lắm đấy
<b>ANSWER: </b>


<b>a.</b>Nam wants to go to the movie.
b.Lan doesn’t want to to the……
c.Lan wants to listen to music…..
d.Hoa doesn’t want to go to……..
e. It’s Sunday.


<i><b>Remember</b></i><b>: </b><i><b> Khi muốn đưa ra</b></i>
một đề nghị, một lời rủ rê, ta
dùng:Let’s + bare_inf…


Ex: Let’s go to the movies
tonight.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

 Asks Ps to write some suggestions with


 What about …? Why don’t we…?



 What about + V_ing….?


<i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b>:</b><i>Exercise </i>Make suggestion and reponses
Model: A: go swimming


B: Agree A: Let’s go swimming.


<i><b> B: It’s a great idea. I’d love to.</b></i>
Model: B: go to the movie theatre


B: Disagree A: What about going to the movie theatre?
<i><b> B: I’m sorry. I can’t ... I ...</b></i>


<b>Homework: -</b>Learn by heart the dialogueand the new word.
-Prepare B2,4 . Do exercise 2 page 137.


<b> Week 12</b>

<b> Period 36</b>

<i><b>Unit 6</b></i>

:

<i><b>AFTER SCHOOL</b></i>


<b>B</b>

<b>2, 4</b>





<b>I. Objectives:</b>Talking about some activities after school.Practicing reading.Telling them some activities or
some organizations in USA.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>
* Grammar:


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: Teenager, top ten, attend, organization, scouts, guides ....
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays



<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> </b>


<b> Warm up</b> <b>Make suggestion and reponses</b>
Model: A: go swimming


B: Agree A: Let’s go swimming.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

<i><b>Pre-reading</b></i>


<i><b>While-reading</b></i>


<i><b>Post-Reading</b></i>


B: It’s a great idea. I’d love to.
Model: B : go to the movie theatre


B: Disagree A: What about going to the
<i><b>movie theatre?</b></i>


<i><b> B: I’m sorry. I can’t ... I ...</b></i>


 T asks Ps some words such as: scouts


and guides. And then, T explains these
words to them.



 Scout = boy scout, the Scouts = the Boy
Scouts of America.


 Guide = girl guide (BE), girl scout (AE)
 Ask students to name some activities and


organizations for teenagers that they
know.


 Have them join in groups and name the
activities.


 Let them read the passage and check the
activities or organizations that they know.
 Have them reread the passage and


answer the questions about the passage.
 Let them <b>work in groups</b>.


 Ask them to brainstorm the activities that
teenagers often do after school hours.
 Let them discuss and make a list of their


top ten most favourite leisure activities.
 Ask two representatives of the <b>groups </b>to


report their list to the class.


 Brainstorm ways that young pupils should


do to help the community.


 Let them read the text and tell how they
can do for the community.


 Check the information with the students.
 Let them discuss together.


Have them brainstorm further activities
which they can do to help the community.


-scout (n) nam hướng đạo sinh
-guide (n) nữ hướng đạo sinh
-organization (n)


-scout (n)
-guide (n)


-musical instrument (Comp.N)
-make models of things
-community (n) cộng động
-service (n) phục vụ


-volunteer (n) tình nguyện
-candy stripes (comp. n) hộ lý
tình nguyện


-striped (a) sọc


-work on (v) tham gia vào


-To be concerned about (expr)
-campaign (n) chiến dịch
-neighborhood (n) hàng xóm,
láng giềng, vùng lân cận.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

1. Which of the activities in the list for American teenagers do you think are also popular among
Vietnamese teenagers? (watch TV, listen to music, go to the movies, help old people..)


2. Are there many kinds of entertainment for teenagers in VietNam? What are they?
<b>Consolidation:</b>


Complete the passage, use the words given in the box


<i>Coins, play, community, popular, what, going, music, or, scouts, help, enjoyment, restaurants.</i>


A magazine survey of 13 years old show (1)………… American teenagers like to do in their free
time. Here are some most (2)………activities.


Eating in fast food (3)………is one of their favorite. Some young people attend youth
organization such as (4)………and guides.Many of them learn to (5)…………a musical instrument.


Most of the young enjoy (6)………… shopping. Watching television is also their (7)…………
Some like to go to the movies while others listen to (8)…………Several of them collect things such as
stamps or (9)…… A few make models of things such as cars (10)……… planes.


And there are many volunteers who (11)… old people with their shopping or cleaning.
Teenagers are doing more (12)………..


<b>Homework:</b>



 Learn by heart the vocabulary.


 Exercise B2, B3 in workbook page 38.
 Prepare period 37 (B3 + B5)


<b>Week 13 Period 37</b>

<i><b>Unit 6</b></i>

:

<i><b>AFTER SCHOOL</b></i>



<b> B</b>

<b>3, 5</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>Making suggestion and invitation.Accepting or refusing the invitation.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: join, wedding, you are welcome.
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>


<b>Presentation</b>


 <b>Correcting the mistake</b>.
<b>T gives the exercise .</b>



<b>Ps find the mistakes and correct.</b>
 T introduces the new lesson.
 Write down the title on the board.


<b> The exercise.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


 Let students listen to the dialogue twice.
 They close or open their book.


 Read and find out the new words.


 Practice reading the new words <b>in</b>
<b>chorally and individully.</b>


 Repeat the dialogue after the teacher.
 Present the vocab on the board and then


explain them to the students.


 Have practice <b>pratice in pairs</b>, alternating
the roles.


 Have <b>some pairs</b> roleplay the dialogue in
front of the class.



*Play with words


T helps pupils how to pronounce and then
they read <b>in chorus</b>.


<b>New words:</b>


<b>-</b>join =take part in (v)
-invite (v)


-would you like………?
<i>Remember:</i>:


What should we ….?
Would you like to …?
Let’s …


What about …?


I’m sorry. I can’t.
I’d love to (but…)


<b>Consolidation:</b>


<b>Excercise: </b><i><b>Write about Jean’s week. Use the correct form of the verb</b></i><b> . </b>
Monday watch the football on TV


Tuesday play tennis after work
Wednesday stay in and study



Thursday go to the gym at 5 o’clock.
Friday go out with friends


Saturday do housework and go shopping
Sunday play bridge with friends.


 <b>Model: On Monday, Jean watches the football on TV.</b>


<b>Homework:</b>


 Learn by heart the structure.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<b> Week 13</b>

<b> Period 38</b>

<i><b>Unit 6</b></i>

:

<i><b>AFTER SCHOOL</b></i>


<b> LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>






<b>I. Objectives:</b>Help Sts remember about the Present continuous tense; that; this; those; these & they can
do the exercises.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>
* Grammar:


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>



<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up:</b> <b>*Circle the correct answer</b>
- T gives the exercise .


<b>The exercise</b>.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Activity 4</b>


<b>Activity 5</b>


<b>Activity 6</b>


- Sts complete in pair.


*T asks Sts some words or some
questions to help remember the
previous knowledge.


- T uses some pictures to help them
find out new words.



- T reads new words.


- T asks them to read new words.


- T asks them about time; present
progressive tense; this; that; these;
those; subjects.


- T introduces exercises.


- Then T corrects.


- T uses real thing to help them practice
about “ this, that, these, those”.


- Then T uses pictures about the
sujects. <b>Work in pair or group.</b>


- T asks them to go to the board &
writethree sentences about Ba.


- <b>Work in pair.</b>


- T asks Sts to make suggestions.


- T uses somes pictures to help them
practise. . <b>Work in pair</b>


- T can correct their pronunciation.



- Ask them to do homework carefully.


2.………are you doing, Nam?
A.What B. aWhere C. Who
3.They study … to use a computer.
A.what way B.<b> </b>how C.<b> </b>the way
4.What ……… do you like best? -
Math.


A.exercise B.<b> </b>subject C.<b> </b>work


Anwer 1.


is doing; is writing ; is reading ;is
cooking ;are playing ;is kicking…..
Anwer 2


a. this; b. this,that ,this; c. those,
these d.those, these.


Anwer 3


b.It starts at 7.15.
c. I’ll be home at 10.30.
d. I’ll come at 6.45.
Anwer 4


a.Physical education.
b.Chemestry



c. Math
d. Geography
Anwer 5


a.Ba seldom rides abike to school.
b.Ba always practices ….


c.Ba usually does….
Anwer 6


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<b>Homework</b>


- Ask them to look at the pictures to say
about the pictures.


*T writes some exercises to help them
to do at home.


- Learn the old words . the structures
to make the TEST 2.


B. Would you like towatch movies?
I’d love to.


<b>Week 13 Period 39</b>


<b>TEST ENGLISH 2</b>



<b>I. Objectives: </b>T can check up and appreciate the knowledge, ability of the students, so T should Help Sts
remember about the the knowledge. Students must find the best way to learn if they are not good.



<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: . Present continuous tense, Simple present tense, Future simple tense; that; this; those; these


& they can do th

e

exercises.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<b>Week 14 Period 40</b>

<b>Unit 7:</b>

<b>THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>A</b>

<b>1</b>





<b>I. Objectives:</b>Talk about a student’s work. Talk about holidays and vacations.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: <i>Simple present tense , Comparative adjectives.</i>


* <i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>: Quite – almost – during - together
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>chatting</b>



<b>Ask students to tell about their routine.</b>


<b>1.</b> <b>What time do you often get up?</b>


<b>2.</b> <b>What time do you usually have</b>
<b>breakfast?</b>


<b>3.</b> <b>When does your school start?</b>


<b>4.</b> <b>When does your school finish?</b>
*Introduce the situation of the dialogue.


<b>Answer </b>


<b>a. I often get up at six. </b>
b……….
c……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


“There are two members: Hoa and Hoa’s
uncle. They are talking to each other about
their daily life.”


T: You will hear a conversation between Hoa


and Hoa’s uncle. They are talking about their
daily activities.


T: plays the tape


Ps: listen (books closed)


Ps: listen again (books opened)


Ps: look at the passage and try to understand
the passage.


T: gives them the meaning of the difficult
words.


Ps: repeat them after the teacher


Ps: repeat sentence by sentence after the
tape.


T: corrects their mistakes if necessary.
Ps: read the passage <b>in pairs (6 pairs)</b>


T: chooses <b>the best pairs</b> to read in front of
the class


Ps: read


T: asks them to answer the questions to
check their understanding.



a) What time do Hoa’s classes start?
b) What time do they finish?


c) For how many hours a day does Hoa
do her homework?


<i>last (v)</i>
<i>almost (adv)</i>


<i><b>Keys</b></i>


<i>1. at 7 o’clock.</i>


<i>2. at a quarter past eleven.</i>
<i>3. For 2 hours a day.</i>


<i>4. She’ll go and see Mom and </i>
<i>Dad on the farm.</i>


<i>5.</i> <i>I’ll visit my grandparents. My</i>
<i>classes start earlier.</i>


<i>6.</i> <i>It starts in Septerber.</i>
<i>7.</i> <i>It finishes in June.</i>


<b>Consolidation:</b>


<i><b>Complete the sentences. Put in a little or a few</b></i>
1. There is ………… orange juice in the glass.


2. I have ………… books in English.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

5. We need ………… vegetables for lunch.
6. They produce ………… eggs.


7. They will have ………… milk every day.
<i><b>Homework</b></i>


 Learn vocabulary and do homework 1,2 in workbook page 43
 Remember to prepare A2, A3 for the next period (41)


<b>Week 14 Period 41</b>

<b>Unit 7:</b>

<b>THE WORLD OF WORK</b>



<b>A</b>

<b>2, 3</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>Guide students to read and write a letter in English.Talk about holidays and vacations.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: <i>Simple present tense ,Comparative adjectives.</i>
* Vocabulary: true – vacation – Easter – thanksgiving - Christmas
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up</b>



<b>Pre-reading</b>


<i><b>Complete the sentences. Put in a little or a</b></i>
<i><b>few</b></i>


1. There is ………… orange juice in the glass.
2. I have ………… books in English.


3. She has ………… money.


4. There is ………… meat in the basket
*Introduce the situation of the dialogue.


This is a letter Which Tim write to Hoa, a


<b>Answer</b>
1.a little
2. a few
3. alittle
4……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

<b>While-reading</b>


<b>Post-reading</b>
<b>Teaching A4</b>
<b>Pre_listening</b>
<b>While-listening:</b>


<b>Post-listening:</b>



friend in VN. He tells her some more about
the students’ life in America and he also
wants to know the students’ life in VN.


-Have them read quickly and find out whose
letter it is and to whom it is sent.Let them
read the letter <b>individually</b>.Have some read
aloud


 T explains the meaning of these holidays
(Easter, Thanksgiving..)


 Let them read the questions and find the
answers<b>. Work in pair.</b>


 Let them look at the pictures and ask them
to guess what day it is. Teacher can
remind some things about these days.
 Have them listen to the tape twice and


write the names of the holidays.


 Ask them to listen again and check the
answers.


 Give correct answers.


 Let them write “Remember” in the
notebooks.



<i>New Year (n)</i>
<i>Easter (n)</i>


<i>4th<sub> of July = Independence day.</sub></i>
<i>Thanksgiving (n)</i>


<i>Christmas (n)</i>
<i><b>Key</b></i>


1. <i>Thanks giving</i>


2. <i>New Year’s Eve (Day)</i>
3. <i>Independence Day</i>
4. <i>Christmas</i>


<i><b>Key</b></i>


Tim enjoys all the public
holidays.


At Christmas, he always gets a
lot of gifts.


Thanksgiving is an important
celebration, and there is always
turkey and lots of good food.
In Tim’s hometown, there is
always a large fireworks display
on Independence Day.



Tim likes New Year because he
can stay up until midnight and
celebrate with his parents.
<b>Consolidation:</b>


Complete the chart below.


Holidays Dates


Independence Day of Vietnam


………
………
………
May Day


………
January 1st


December 25th


August 15th<sub> (lunar year)</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

Liberation Day of Vietnam


………
Thanksgiving Day


………
July 4th



………
<i><b>Homework</b></i>


 Learn vocabulary and do homework 3,4 in workbook page 44
 Remember to prepare A4 for the next period (42)


<b>Week 14 Period 42</b>

<b>Unit 7:</b>

<b>THE WORLD OF WORK</b>



<b>A</b>

<b>4</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>Guide students to read the text fluently.Talk about a student’s work.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: <i>Simple present tense ,Comparative adjectives.</i>
* Vocabulary: Typical – keen – review – definitely


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up </b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b>chatting</b>



<b>Ask students to tell about their routine</b>.
1.What time do you often get up?


2.What time do you usually have
breakfast?


3.When does your school start?
4.When does your school finish?


*Introduce the situation of the dialogue.


<b>Answer </b>


<b>a. I often get up at six. </b>
b……….
c……….
Vocabulary


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


This is a text talking about Hoa, a keen
student in class 7. She works 45 hours a
week. She works harder than any workers.


 Have them read quickly and find out the


vocabulary in the text.


 Let them read the letter in <b>chorally,</b>
<b>individually</b>.


 Have some read aloud.


* <b>Work in pair to answer the questions.</b>
 Let them read the questions and find


the answers.


<b>* TEACHING THE COMPARATIVE</b>


<i>4. definitely (adv)</i>
Answer


1.People think that students have an
easy life because they only work a
few hours a day and have long
vacations.


2.Hoa works 20 hours a week. It is
fewer than most workers work.


3.Student’s answer


4. No, he doesn’t think that students
are lazy.



Grammar<i>:</i>


Comparative of Adjective
<i>Short Adj</i>: short adj + er + than
Ex: This ruler is (long) than that one.
This ruler is <i>longerthan</i> that one.
<i>Long Adj</i>:more + long adj + than
Ex: She is more beautiful than her
sister.


 <i>Irregular adjectives</i>:
Good/well better
Bad/badly worse


Far farther
<b>Consolidation:</b>


<i>Complete the sentences, use the comparatives or superlatives</i>
1. Lan does her homework (well) than Tuan does.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

4. You should do all the (far) practice in this book.
5. There are (many) vehicles in the street.


<i><b>Homework</b></i>


 Learn vocabulary and do homework 3,4 in workbook page 44
 Remember to prepare B1 for the next period (43)


<b>Week 15 Period 43</b>

<b>Unit 7:</b>

<b>THE WORLD OF WORK</b>




<b>B</b>

<b>1</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>Talk about a typical working day Tell about the differences between a typical American
working day and Vietnamese working day.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: <i>Simple present tense, Comparative adjectives.</i>


* Vocabulary: Mechanic – buffalo – feed – real – crop – shed – speed – coop


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up </b>


<b>Presentation</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>BRAIN STORMING</b>


<b>-Draw the circle with an example.</b>
<b>Divite the class into two groups.</b>
<b>Write the jobs.</b>



 Introduce the situation and ask
students to have a look at the
questions (ae)


 Elicit the new words.


 Have them read quickly and find out


<b> TEACHER</b>


<b> JOB</b>
- student


- worker


<b>Vocabulary</b>
<i>send (v)</i>


<i>take care of (v)= look after</i>
<i>part-time ≠ full-time</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


the vocabulary in the text.


 Let them read the letter in <b>chorally,</b>
<b>individually</b>.



 Let them listen to Tim’s letter once.
 Ask students to read the letter


individually.


 Let them read the questions and find
the answers from the letter.


 <b>Work in pair to answer the</b>
<b>questions.</b>


 Have some students give answers in
class.


 Give the correct answers.


<i>homeless (a)</i>
<i>mechanic (n)</i>
<i>machine (n)</i>
<i>prefer …to (v)</i>
<i>shift (n)</i>


<i>public holiday (n)</i>
<b> Questions :</b>


1.She works at home, but three mornings a
week, she works part-time at a local
supermarket.



2.She cooks lunch for homeless people
once a week.


3.He is a mechanic. He repairs machines in
a factory.


4.He usually works about 40 hours a week.
5.The Jones family always goes to Florida
on vacation. They have a great time there.
- <b>Consolidation : Use the simple present or present continuous. </b>


1. She / listen / music / now.
2. He / often / play / football.
3. Lan / sing / a new song / now.
4. Tom / go / school / everyday.


5. We / have / bread / milk / breakfast.
<b>Homework</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

<b>Week 15 Period 44</b>

<b>Unit 7:</b>

<b>THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>B</b>

<b>2</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about a typical working day.


- Tell about the differences between a typical American working day and Vietnamese working day.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>



* Grammar: <i>Simple present tense</i> ,<i>Adverbs of Frequency / Comparative adjectives.</i>
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up </b>


<b>Pre- reading</b>


<b>While- reading</b>


<b>*BRAIN STORMING</b>


<b>-Draw the circle with an example.</b>
<b>Divite the class into two groups.</b>
<b>Write the jobs.</b>


 Introduce the situation of the text by
the pictures in the textbook. Mr.Tuan
is taking the buffalo to the fields.
 Let them look at the pictures and


brainstorm the work or daily
activities of a typical farmer . <b>Work</b>
<b>in pair or group.</b>



 Have students read the text by
<b> </b>


<b> TEACHER</b>


<b> JOB</b>


- Student


- Farmer


<b>Vocabulary</b>
<i>Feed (v)</i>


<i>buffalo (n) buffalo shed (n)</i>
<i>pig (n)</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

themselves.


 Elicit the meaning of the key
vocabulary in the passage.


 Ask students to read the text again.
 Guide them to summarize the text .


<i>animal (n)</i>


<i>chicken coop (n)</i>
<i>less (a)</i>



<i>take a day off (v)</i>
<i>real (a)</i>


<b>Post- reading</b>


<i><b>Match two halves of the sentences together and write them down</b></i>
1. The American longest vacation


2. Hoa’s father works


3. When Tim’s father is free


4. Tim’s mother and her friends cook
5. Vietnamese students have


6. We work about 25 hours a week
7. Mr.Tuan has breakfast,


8. They grow some rice,
9. Four or five times a year,


10. In the future robots do everything


a. He plays golf


b. Fewer hours than any workers


c. Then he feeds the buffalo, pigs and chickens.
d. When there is less work, Mr.Tuan takes a day



off and goes to the city.


e. We’ll have less work and more money to spend.
f. More than Tim’s father does.


g. Lunch for homeless people.
h. Is in the summer.


i. Fewer vacations than American students.
j. But their main crop is vegetables.


<i><b>Homework</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

<b>Week 15 Period 45</b>

<b>Unit 7:</b>

<b>THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>B</b>

<b>3, 4, 5</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about a typical working day.


- Tell about the differences between a typical American working day and Vietnamese working day.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar:
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.



<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up </b>


<b>Presentation </b>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b> </b>


<b> Match the column A and B.</b>
A B


1.Mr john is a. Two days off.
2. He works b. a farmer.


3. He has c.forty hours per week.


 Have students look at the table and
explain the task of the exercise.


 Ask them to reread Tim’s letter and the
passage about Mr.Tuan and fill in the
table the information needed. . <b>Work in</b>
<b>pair or group.</b>



<b>Answer </b>


<b>1 + b 2+c 3+ a</b>
<b>Vocabulary</b>
<i>hour per week </i>
<i>amount of vacation </i>
<i>future (n)</i>


<i>speed (n)</i>
<i>robot (n)</i>


<i><b>Answer B3</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<b>Activity 3</b>
<b>Teaching B4</b>
<b>Pre_listening</b>


<b>While-listening:</b>


<b>Post-listening</b>


 Call on some students to give the
answers.


 Give the key.


 Have students look at the table and
explain the task. Find out the new words
 Practise reading the new words.



 Let them listen to the tape twice and note
the answers.


 Have them listen again and check their
answers.


 T reads the first time, students listen.
 Students are asked to repeat.


 Listen and take note, give the answer.
 Guide them to translate into Vietnamese.


<i>Mr Tuan 84- one or five times a </i>
<i>year-no real vacation.</i>


<i><b>AnswerB 4 </b></i>


<i>Peter; doctor- 70- 4 weeks.</i>
<i>Susan;nurse- 50 -3 weeks.</i>
<i>Jane ;shop assistant-35-1 </i>
<i>week.</i>


<i>Phong; factory 48- 2 weeks<b>.</b> </i>


<i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b>:</b><i>Multiple choice.</i>
1. You will be late ………. School.


A. at B. for C. in


2. Their summer vacation starts ………June.



A. in B. on C. at


3. Hoa will see her parents ……… their farm.


A. on B. at C. in


4. Hoa likes ……… her parents with the farm work.
A. helps B. helping C. help


5. Farmers have to work ………. all day long.


A. hard B. hardly C. harder


6. The ………. vacation is in summer.


A. longer B. longest C. long


<i><b>Homewor</b>k<b> </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

<b> Week 16</b>

<b> Period 46</b>

<b>Unit 8:</b>

<b>PLACES </b>


<b>A</b>

<b>1, 2</b>





<b>I. Objectives:</b>Ask for and give directions.Ask for and give distances.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Modal: Could



Prepositions of position and directions
Expression for asking and giving directions.
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<i><b>Warm up:</b></i>


<i><b>Presentation</b></i>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<i><b>Multiple choice.</b></i>


1.You will be late ………. School.


A. at B. for C. in


2.Their summer vacation starts ………June.


A. in B. on C. at


3.Hoa will see her parents ……… their farm.


A. on B. at C. in



4.Hoa likes ……… her parents with the farm work.
A. helps B. helping C. help


- T introduces the new lesson by asking
students to look at the pictures and
identify the places to themselves.


- Ask students to give the names of the
places. . <b>Work in pair or group.</b>


<b>Answer </b>


<b>1. b 2.a. 3.a. 4.b.</b>


a.National Bank of Vietnam (in Hanoi)
b.Saint Paul Hospital. (in Hanoi)
c.Hotel. (in Hanoi)


d.The Central Post Office. (in Hanoi)
e.Hanoi railway station.


f.Dong Xuan Market. (in Hanoi)


<b>Vocabulary</b>:
-Tourist (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>



<b>Activity 4</b>


<b>Activity 5</b>


<b>Homework:</b>


- Make any corrections. <b>Work in pair or</b>
<b>group.</b>


-Use additional pictures to do the same as
the above.


- T gives a picture and asks the students:
“Who are they” “Where are they?” “What
does the tourist want?”.


- T presents the vocabulary on the board.
And then T asks students to listen to the
tape.


- Listen the first time, Books closed.


- The second time, Listen and repeat after
the tape.


- T present the expression used to ask for
the way and give location / direction.
- Let them practice the dialogue in pairs.
- Ask some students to translate into



Vietnamese.


*Ask for and give directions to these places.
- Bank, supermarket, market, toy store.


*Learn by heart the structure and the
vocabulary


- Do Exercise 1 in workbook page 47 & 48
- Prepare period 47:Lesson A3.


ASKING FOR DIRECTION


Khi muốn hỏi đường, ta có thể
dùng:


Could you show me the way to
the post office?


Could you tell me how to get to
the post office?


<b>GIVING DIRECTIONS</b>


Khi muốn hướng dẫn ai làm việc
gì, ta thường dùng cấu trúc mệnh
lệnh.


Go straight ahead.



Take the second street on the
left.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

<b>Week 16 Period 47</b>

<b>Unit 8:</b>

<b>PLACES </b>


<b> A</b>

<b>3</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>Ask for and give directions.Ask for and give distances.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Modal: Could


Prepositions of position and directions
Expression for asking and giving directions.


* Vocabulary: fork(n)=three- waycrossroads, turning poit; intersection , crossroad…
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<i><b> Warm up:</b></i>


<b> Presentation :</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>
<b>Activity 2</b>



<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>*BRAIN STORMING</b>


<b>-Draw the circle with an example.</b>
<b>Divite the class into two groups. Write</b>
<b>the places.</b>


- T introduces the new lesson by asking
students to look at the pictures and
identify the places to themselves.
- Ask students to give the names of the


places. . <b>Work in pair or group.</b>
*Make any corrections.


- Use additional pictures to do the same
as the above. .<b>Work in pair.</b>


- T gives a picture and asks the
students: “Who are they” “Where are
they?” “What does the tourist want?”.
- T presents the vocabulary on the


<b> MARKET</b>


<b> PLACES</b>
- <b>Post office.</b>
- <b>Bank. </b>
<b>New words</b>



-fork(n)=three- waycrossroads,
turning poit;


-intersection(n)
-crossroad(n)


<b>ASKING FOR DIRECTION</b>


Khi muốn hỏi đường, ta có thể
dùng:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b>Pre_listening</b>


<b>While-listening:</b>


<b>Post -listening:</b>


<b>Consolidation:</b>


<b>Homework:</b>


board. And then T asks students to
listen to the tape.


- Listen the first time, Books closed.
- The second time, Listen and repeat


after the tape.



- T present the expression used to ask
for the way and give location /
direction.


- Let them practice the dialogue in
pairs.


- Ask some students to translate into
Vietnamese.


<b>Ask for and give directions to these </b>
<b>places</b>.


-school,Bank, supermarket, market,


*Learn by heart the structure and the
vocabulary.


-Do Exercise A2 in workbook page 47 &
48.


-Prepare period 49:Lesson A4,5.( ask and
answer : how far ………….? )


Could you tell me how to get to
the post office?


GIVING DIRECTIONS


Khi muốn hướng dẫn ai làm việc gì,


ta thường dùng cấu trúc mệnh lệnh.


Go straight ahead.


Take the second street on the
left.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

<b> Week 16</b>

<b> Period 48</b>

<b>Unit 8:</b>

<b>PLACES </b>


<b> A</b>

<b>4, 5</b>





<b>I. Objectives:</b>Ask for and give directions. Ask for and give distances.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Modal: Could


Prepositions of position and directions
Expression for asking and giving directions.
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<i><b>Warm up:</b></i>



<i><b>Presentation:</b></i>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<i><b>CHATTING </b></i>


<b>- T. asks Sts some questions</b> .
<i><b>- Sts answer.</b></i>


<i><b>1. How do you go to school?</b></i>


2. Where do you live?


- T revise the lesson: 2 pupils are asked to
practice asking the way and giving the
directions. And then write the vocabulary.
- This is the dialogue between Lan and Hoa.
Hoa wants to ask Hoa about distances from
one place to another.


- Ask students to listen the first time and give
the names of the places mentioned.


- Ask students to listen, repeat the dialogue
in the book and find out the places.



- Let students practice the dialouge <b>in</b>
<b>pairs</b>, change <b>the roles.</b>


- Let them read the dialogue silently.
- T correct their mistakes if necessary.


<b>Answer:</b>


1.I go to school on foot.
2. I live in My Xuan village.


<b>New words</b>
- distance (v)


- guess (v) Have a guess.
- Coach (n)


<b>QUESTIONS WITH “ HOW</b>
<b>FAR ” A 5.</b>


1.How far is it from Hue to HCM
city?


It’s about 1200 km.


2.How far is it from NhaTrang to
….city?


It’s about 300 km.
IT + TAKES ...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<b>Activity 4( A5)</b>


- Have students <b>work in pairs</b>.


* Let them look at the map and the table of
distances.


- Give models.


- Ex: How far is it from <i>BaRia</i> to <i>VungTau</i>?
It is about 24 km.


- Remind how to read the number.


- Have them pratice ask and answer the
questions about distances. <b>Work in pair</b>
<b>or group.</b>


<i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b>:</b>


<b>Put the words in the right order</b>
1. you / live/ Where/ do?


2. it / from / how / city / far / Hanoi / is / Ho Chi Minh / to?
3. You / do / or / need / envelopes / stamps?


Homework:


<b>-</b> Learn by heart the structure and the vocabulary



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<b>Week 17 Period 49</b>

<b>Unit 8:</b>

<b>PLACES </b>


<b> B</b>

<b>1</b>





<b>I. Objectives:</b>Ask for information at the post office. Ask about prices. Make polite requests.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Would you like + to_inf
Need + to_inf


How much …


* Vocabulary: send (v) = post (v) ≠ receive (v)envelope( n)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<i><b>Warm up:</b></i>


<i><b>Presentation:</b></i>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>



<b>QUESTIONS WITH “ HOW FAR ” . </b>
1. How far is it from hue to HCM CITY?
2. How far is it from Nna Trang to HCM
city?


3. How far is it from here to your house?


- T. revise the lesson: 2 pupils are
asked to check vocabulary and
practice the dialogue A4 again.
- This is the dialogue between Liz and


Clerk. Liz wants to send the letter to
her friend in USA.


- Let students look at the pictures and
ask them about the services people
can have there.


- Elicit and explain new structures and
vocabulary.


<b>Answer:</b>


1.It’s about 1200 km.
2.It’s about 300 km.


3. IT ‘s about one kilometer.
<i><b>New words </b></i>



send (v) = post (v) ≠ receive (v)
envelope (n)


cost (v)
change (n)
Ask about prices


How much + be + S?
It is / They are + number of


money.


How much do / does + S +
cost?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Activity 4</b>


- Ask students to listen the first time
and guess the vietnamese meaning
of the dialogue.


- Ask students to listen and repeat the
dialogue.


- Let students practice the dialouge in
<b>pairs, change the roles.</b>


- Let them read the dialogue silently.


- Tell students to ask and answer the


questions <b>in pairs.</b>


- T correct their mistakes if necessary.


Ex:


-These shoes cost 50.000 dong. -How
much do these shoes cost?


-An envelope and a stamp are 2.000
dong.


-How much are an envelope and a
stamp?


<b>Answer:</b>


1. Liz will mail her letter at the post
office.


2. Liz pays 11.5000 altogether.
3. She receives 3.500 change


<i><b>About you</b></i><b>.</b><i><b> </b></i>


4..It’s in my xuan, opposite my school.
5.I get there by bicycle.



<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


<b>Exercise 1: Write questions for these answers, use How much ……….</b><b>?</b>
1. This dress costs 100.000 dong.


<b>………</b>


2. These hamburgers are 20.000 dong.


<b>……….</b>


3. This book is 15.000 dong.


<b>………...</b>


4. A dozen of eggs is 8.000 dong.


<b>……….</b>


5. This bag costs 2.000 dong.


<b>………</b>


<b>Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Learn by heart the structure and the vocabulary. Do exercise 1 page 50.


<b>-</b> Prepare period 50:Lesson B2,3<b>.( NEW WORDS AND QUESTIONS</b>)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<b> B</b>

<b>2, 3</b>




<b>I. Objectives: </b>Ask for information at the post office. Ask about prices.Make polite requests.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Would you like + to_inf
Need + to_inf


How much …
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<i><b> Warm up:</b></i>


<i><b>Presentation:</b></i>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>QUESTIONS : </b>


1.How far is it from Hue to HCM city?


2.What are you going to do next week?


- This is the dialogue between Nga and
Hoa. Hoa would like some local stamps
and some stamps for overseas mail.
- Let students look at the pictures and


guess two students are doing. Then T
asks students the questions like that:
What are they? Tell me who they are.
- Elicit and explain new structures “need to


buy” and “ need a phone card”


- Ask students to listen the first time and
guess the vietnamese meaning of the
dialogue.


- Ask students to listen and repeat the
dialogue.


- Let students practice the dialouge <b>in</b>
<b>pairs, change the roles.</b>


<b>Answer:</b>


1.It’s about 1200 km.


2.I’m going to visit my parents.



<i><b>* New words</b>:</i>
local (a)


oversea mail (n)
phone card (n)
go in (v)


phone card (n)
postcard (n)


<b>Questions:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<b>Activity 4</b>


<b>Homework:</b>


- Let them read the dialogue silently.


- Tell students to ask and answer the
<b>questions in pairs</b>.


- Ask them to find the answers to the
questions in the text.


- T correct their mistakes if necessary.
- T guides the students to read aloud.


- Have <b>some pairs</b> read aloud their
dialogue.



- Make any necessary corrections.


- Ask students to make similar dialouges in
<b>pairs, alternating roles.</b>


- Call on some pairs to roleplay their
dialogues.


* Learn by heart the structure and the
vocabulary


-Do exercies 1,2 page 50.
-Prepare period 51:Lesson B4, 5 .


2.Because she has a pen pal in
America.


3.She needs a phone to call….


<b>Week 17 Period 51</b>

<b>Unit 8:</b>

<b>PLACES </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>




<b>I. Objectives:</b>Ask for information at the post office. Ask about prices. Make polite requests. Help students
pratice listening skill to get the information from it.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Would you like + to_inf, Need + to_inf ,How much …
* Vocabulary:



<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<i><b> Warm up:</b></i>


<b> </b><i><b>Pre</b></i><b> </b><i><b>-listening</b></i><b> : </b>


<i><b>While-listening</b></i>


<i><b>Post-listening</b></i>


<b> Make wh- questions:</b>


<b>1.He is a doctor. – What does he do?</b>
<b>2.how much is a pen? - It’s 2.000 dong.</b>
- Let students look at the pictures and


introduce the situation to them.


- T. revises the lesson: 2 pupils are asked
to read the dialogue B3, and then
translate into Vietnamese and write
some vocabulary.


- This is the text talking about the price of


the items which Mrs. Robinson buys at
the stationery store.


- Let students look at the pictures and
introduce the situation to them.


- Have them listen again and find the
price of each item.


- Play the tape again for students to
check the answers.


- Have them calculate the total cost and
the change.


- Call on some students to give the


<b>THE TAPE TRANSCRIPT</b>.


<b>Answer;</b>


<b>*</b>The total cost is59.000dong.


* She will have 1.000 dong in chance.


<b>Answer B5</b>
a. It is 800 dong.


b. It is about 12.000 dong.



c.The post office sells envelopes,
post cards, phone cards..


d.Yes, I do. I often write to my
<i>Mrs.Robinsin goes to a </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

<i><b>Presentation:</b></i>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Homework:</b>


answers and correct.


- T correct their mistakes if necessary.
<i>Questions</i>:


1.What is the total cost?
-The total cost is 59.000 dong.


2.How much change will Mrs.Robinson
have from 60.000 dong?


-She will have 1.000 dong in change.
*T guides students to give the answers.
- Let them ask and answer the questions


<b>in pairs.</b>



- Ask them questions and let them give
the answers.


- Call on <b>some pairs</b> to ask and answer
the questions.


- Ask Sts to give the correct answer.
- Sts copy the correct answer.


- Learn by heart the structure and the
vocabulary carefully.


-Prepare to revise & take the first term test.


parents.


<b> Week 18 Period 52</b>

<b>REVISION </b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

<b>I/ Choose the best answer :</b>


1.Hurry up or you will be late ...school


a.with b. for c.at


2.You can find Math book ...the shelves...the lelf.
a.on-on b.on-at c.in-on
3. There is...cold water in the glass.



a. a little b. a few c.more .
4.Should we play badminton ?


a.OK,I am sorry b.I am sorry, I can’t c.I love to
5.Let’s ...to the cafeteria for a drink.


a.go b.going c.goes
6.Would you like...to the movies with us tonight ?


a.to go b.goes c.go
7.9 :15 is said :...


a.It is a quarter past nine b.It is fifteen nine c. It is nine quarter
8.You should ...your teeth after erery meals.


a.to brush b. brushing c. brush
<b>II/ Give the correct form of the verbs in bracket:</b>
1.Nam enjoys...the piano ( play)


2.At the moment ,my sister...book in the library (read )
3.She sometimes ...badminton in the evening.( play )
4.He ...14 on his next birthday.( be )


* <b>Answer Key</b>:


I. 1b 2a 3a 4b 5a 6a 7a 8c


II. 1. playing 2. is reading 3. plays 4. will be.


<b>Week 18 Period 53</b>

<b>REVISION (Cont) </b>




<b>I. Objectives:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

<b>I Give the correct form of the adjective in bracket</b>:( 2 marks)


1.Vietnamse students have...vacations than American students (few)
3.Bill is ...than you .( good )


2.Summer vacation is the ...vacation ( long )
4.These shoes are...than those shoes ( expensive)
<b>II/ Put the adverbs in the correct order</b>:<b> </b> ( 2 marks )


1.The children are interested in listening to music. ( usually )
2.We play soccer in the street (never)


3.They don’t go swimming in the winter ( often)
4.What do you do at recess ? (always)


<b>III/ Read the letter carefully</b> :
Dear Tim,


I am very glad to hear that you and your family are well.I am fine , too.


You are right. We have fewer vacations than American students. Each year, we have about four
vacations. Our most important vacation is Tet. Tet holiday often lasts for nine or ten days. Our longest
vacation is summer vacation. It last for almost three months. We usually spend time with our families. We
don’t have vacations for Easter, Thanksgiving and Christmas, but we also celebrate them.


Please write and tell me your last summer vacation.



Your friend,


Hoa


<i><b>1.Check True( T) or False ( F ) ( 1 mark)</b></i>


a.Vietnamse students have fewer vacations than Americant students...
b.Tim writes this letter.


………
<i><b>2.Answer these questions:( 1 mark)</b></i>


a. How long does Tet holiday last ?...


b.Which vacation is the longest?...


* <b>Answer Key</b>


I . 1.fewer 2. longest 3. better 4. more expensive
II. 1. The children are usually interested in listening to music.
2. They never play soccer in the street.


3. They don’t often go swimming in the winter.
4. What do you always do at recess?


III. 1.T 2F


1. Tet holidays often lasts for nine or ten days.
2.The longest vacation is summer vacation.



<b>Week 18 Period 54</b>



<b>TEST FOR THE FIRST SEMESTER </b>


<b>I/ Choose the correct words : ( 3 ms )</b>


1 / They will have ……. Milk for breakfast ( a few , a little )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

3/ ……… do you study in the library after school ? ( How long / How often / How )
- Everyday


4/ My sister loves ……….. Stamps ( collect / to collect / collecting )


5/ The …… popular after school activities are baseball, football and basketball.
( more / much / most )


6/ In language class , students study …….. ( physics / English / geography )
7/ My brother is good …… English ( at / in / with )


8/ We should …….. a lot of fruit and vegetables ( eat / to eat / eats )
<b>II / Supply the correct verbs forms : ( 2ms )</b>


1/ They ( go ) ……..fishing next Sunday


2/ Hoa ( have ) …….. breakfast with her uncle now
3/ What do you like ( do ) …….. during your vacation ?


4/ Our summer vacation ( start ) ……in june and ( last ) ……for almost three months
<b>III Give the correct form of comparison of the adjectives in brackets ( 2ms )</b>
1/ Summer vacation is the ………….. vacation ( long )



2/ Vietnamese students have …………..vacations than American students ( few )
3/ Mr Hoang works ………hours than my father ( many )


4/ Christmas is one of the ……….vacation in America ( important )
<b>IV Read the letter carefully : </b>


Dear Tim ,


Thank you for your letter . It’s very interesting to know about American students’ activities after school
hours


I think we take part in different after school activities, too . Some students stay at school and play sports .
They usually play soccer or table tennis


Some students like music . They often practice playing the guitar in the school


I’m a member of the stamp collector’s club . I have lots of American stamp because I often get letters from
penpal friends like you


We are going to have our TET holidays soon . TET is our most important holiday.Summer vacation is our
longest holidays . Please write and tell me about your vacations


Your friend ,


Hoa


<b>A</b>.<b>Read the letter again . Choose True ( T ) or False ( F ) and anwer the questions</b> : ( 1m )
1/ Hoa often gets letters from Tim , Hoa’s American friend


2/ American students don’t often practice playing the guitar in their school


<b>B. And anwer the questions : ( 1m )</b>


1/ Is Hoa a menber of the stamp collector’s club ?


2/ Which vacation is the most important for Vietnamese students ?
<b>V Rearrange the words in the correct order : ( 1m )</b>


Halong / often / to / Bay / our / vacations / We / go / / during / summer .


<b> Week 19 Period 55</b>

<b>Unit 9:</b>

<b>AT HOME AND AWAY</b>



<b>A</b>

<b>1</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

* Grammar: Past simple tense with irregular verbs.
* Vocabulary: wonderful, think of, ……….
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up:</b>


<b>Presentation : </b>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>



<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Activity 4</b>


<b>*BRAIN STORMING</b>


<b>-Draw the circle with an example. Divite</b>
<b>the class into two groups. Write the</b>
<b>places to travel.</b>


- T introduces the new lesson by asking
students to look at the pictures and identify
the places to them.


- Ask students if they like traveling and
where they often go on summer holidays.


- Ask students if they know NhaTrang or
some famous places in NhaTrang or where
people often go and visit in NhaTrang.


- Tell them to pay attention to the
conversation between Ba and Liz’s trip to
NhaTrang.


- Ask them to identify the places Liz’s family
visited and what they did there.


- Let them listen to the dialogue.



- Have them practice <b>in pairs, alternating</b>
<b>the roles.</b>


- Ask <b>two pairs</b> read the dialogue aloud.
- Guide them to do exercise page 87 and
give correct answers after then.


<b>Answer; </b>


<b> Vung tau beach</b>
<b> PLACES TO TRAVEL.</b>


- Nha Trang.
- Dam sen.


<b>A1. Listen. Then practice……</b>


* <b>Vocabulary</b>.


- welcome back / home
- wonderful (a)


- think of = think about (v)
-friendly (a)


- quite (adv) = very
- take sb to a place (v)
- cham temple (n)


- tri Nguyen Aquarium (n)


- souvenir (n)


- gift = present (n)
- tired (a)


<b>Grammar</b>:The simple pas tense
Use: Dùng để diển tả một hành
động đã xảy ra trong quá khứ với
một thời điểm xác định rõ ràng.
Form: <b>affirmative</b>


a.Động từ có qui tắc (Regular
verb)S + V-ed


Ex: -arrive  arrived
- Help  helped


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

<b>Consolidation</b>


<b>Homework:</b>


3. Liz bought souvernirs.


2. Liz visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium.
4. Liz returned to Ha Noi.


1.Liz went to Nha Trang.


5. Liz talked to Ba about her Vacation.
- Introduce the simple past of three forms


and give examples to illustrate.


**Use the correct verb forms, use the
simple past tense.


1. They (play) soccer yesterday
afternoon.


2. He (send) a letter to his pen pal last
week.


3. Lan (be) at home last night.
4. She (teach) us English last year.
5. We (be) at the seaside two days


ago.


*Learn by heart the structure and the new
words carefully.


- Do Exercise A1, 2, 3 in workbook page 53 &


54.


-Prepare period 56: Lesson A2.


verb)S + V (2nd<sub> column)</sub>


Ex: -be  was / were
- Have  had


<b>Negative</b>:


S + didn’t + bare_inf
S + was / were + not …
Ex: Lan was at home last night.


Lan was not at home last night.
Ex: He bought a cap.


He didn’t buy a cap.
<b>Interrogative</b>:


Did + S + bare_inf..?
Was / Were + S …?


Ex: Was Lan at home last night?
Ex: Did he buy a cap?


<b> Week 19</b>

<b> Period 56</b>

<b>Unit 9:</b>

<b>AT HOME AND AWAY </b>



<b>A</b>

<b>2</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

* Grammar: Past simple tense with irregular verbs.
* Vocabulary: shark, dolphin, turtle, seapood……
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>



<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> Warm up:</b>


<b>Presentation : </b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b> NET WORK</b>


<b>-Draw the circle with an example. Divite</b>
<b>the class into two groups. Write the places</b>
<b>to travel.</b>


* Introduce the Robinson’s trip to TriNguyen
Aquarium.


- Ask them to guess what the Robinson saw
and did there.


- Two students are asked to read the
dialogue and write some vocab.


- Practice reading the new words <b>In</b>
<b>chorally and individually.</b>



- Let them read the passage to themselves.
- Let them check the answer <b>in pairs.</b>
- Call on some <b>pairs </b>to give the answers in


front of the class.
- Give correct answers.


- Tell them to pay attention to the
conversation between Ba and Liz’s trip to
NhaTrang.


- Read and answer the qustions <b>in group</b>.
- Ask and answer the questions <b>in pairs</b>
<b>before the class.</b>


- Give the correct answer and copy.


* <i>Now tell the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen</i>
<i>Aquarium. Begin with:</i>


<b> Vung tau beach</b>


<b> PLACES TO TRAVEL.</b>
- Phong Nha case.
- Dam sen park.
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


-shark (n) cá mập
-dolphin (n) cá heo
-turtle (adj)



-exit (n)
-cap (n)
-poster (n)
-seafood (n)
-noodle (n)
-food stall (n)
-crab (n)
instead (adv)


<b>Key:</b>


1. Liz’s parents went to the
aquarium with her.


2. They saw sharks, dolphins,
turtles and many different
types of fish.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

a. The Robinson family went to the
aquarium.


b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles and
many colorful fish.


c. There was a souvenir shop near the exit
of the aquarium.


d. Mr. Robinson bought Liz a cap with a
picture of a dolphin on it. Mrs. Robinson


bought a poster.


After their visit to the aquarium, the
Robinsons went to a food stall. Mr. and Mrs.
Robinson ate fish and crab but Liz ate
noodles.


4. Yes, she did. Liz wore the
cap all day.


5. Yes, they do. They ate fish
and crab.


6. Because she remembered
the beautiful fish in the
aquarium.


<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


Fill in the gaps with the words in the box


Enjoyed for healthy fun


Holiday beach went and


Last year LAN and her parents (1)………… to Charting (2)……… their holidays. They
sunbathed almost every morning on the (3)………… They stayed there for a week (4)………… had a
lot of (5)………. They think a (6)………… at the beach is (7)………… and pleasant. They (8)…………
themselves very much.



<b>Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Learn by heart the structure and the vocabulary


<b>-</b> Do Exercise A4 in workbook page 54


<b>-</b> Prepare period 57: Lesson A3.


<b>Week 19 Period 57</b>

<b>Unit 9:</b>

<b>AT HOME AND AWAY </b>



<b>A</b>

<b>3</b>



<b>I. Objectives -</b>Talk about past events. Talk about past experiences.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up:</b>


<b>Pre-listening : </b>


<b></b>
<b>While-listening : </b>



<b></b>
<b>Post-listening</b>:


<b>WRITING</b>


<b> * The teacher gives an example. Divite</b>
<b>the class into two groups. Write the verb</b>
<b>in to the past simple.</b>


- 2 students are asked to read the
answer after the whole class.


*Who went to school with you yesterday?
*What did you do yesterday?


*What did they buy in the bookshop last
week?


- Introduce A3 by reminding some details
which they have already learned.


- Turn on the cassette the first time and
the whole class listen.


- Turn on the cassette the second time so
that students can find the answers.
- Ask students to give the answers on the


board.



- T corrects the answers.
- Ps copy the cprrect answer.


<b>Answer;</b>
1.go – went.
2. do – did
3. is – was.


<b>Key:</b>The Robinsons had a great
holiday in Nha Trang. Unfortunately,
the holiday soon ended and it was time
to return home. They took a bus back
to Ha Noi. Liz was excited as the bus
drove through the countryside. She saw
rice paddies for the first time.


Everything looked calm and peaceful.
At four o’clock, the bus stopped at a
small roadside restaurant for 10
minutes. Mr.Robinson was asleep, so
Mrs. Robinson bought some peanuts
and an ice cream for Liz. The bus
arrived in Ha Noi at about 7 p.m.
<b>Answer;</b>


a. B
b. D
c. E
d. H
<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>



Write the past form of the verbs


A. Regular B. Irregular
arrive ...


help ...
look ...
receive ...
remember ...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

rent ...
return ...
stop ...
talk ...
visit ...


see ...
think ...
wear ...
put ...
eat ...
speak ...
teach ...
give ...
get ...
<b>Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Learn the irregular verbs by heart as much as possible.



<b>-</b> Do Exercise A2 in workbook page 53


<b>-</b> Prepare period 58: Lesson A4, 5.


<b>Week 20 Period 58</b>

<b>Unit 9:</b>

<b>AT HOME AND AWAY </b>



<b>A</b>

<b>4,5</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>Talk about past events. Talk about past experiences.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Past simple tense with irregular verbs.
* Vocabulary: next door,keep in touch, improve……….
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up:</b>


<b>Pre-reading : </b>


<b>While-reading : </b>


<b>Post-reading</b>:


A5. Play with



words.


<b>WRITING</b>


<b>The teacher gives an example. Divite</b>
<b>the class into two groups. Write the</b>
<b>verb in to the past simple.</b>


* The students are asked to write some
sentences by using the verbs on the board.
- T introduces the content of the text.


- Ask students to read sentence by
sentence.


- Find out the new words and then T
presents & explains them on the board.
- Have them read the passages from Ba’s


diary once more time, and check if the
sentences are true according to the
passage. <b>pair work</b>


<i>Now make these sentences true</i>:
1. Liz lived a long way from Ba.


2. Liz learned Vietnamese in the USA.
3. Liz collects stamps.


4. Liz’s aunt lives in Viet Nam.



5. The Robinsons moved to Ho Chi Minh city.
6. The Robinsons moved. Now Ba is happy.
7. Ba is never going to see Liz again.


*. Play with words.


T helps students how to pronounce and then
students read in chorus.


<b>Answer;</b>


1.speak – spoke.
2. stop – stopped.
3. are – were.
<b>Vocabulary.</b>


- a good friend of mine
- rent st from sb (v)
- next door (adv)
- move to (v)


- on the other side (adv)
- keep in touch (v)
- improve (v)


- receive st from sb (v)
- live a long way from


<b>Key:</b>



a. Liz lived next door to Ba.


b. Liz learned Vietnamese in
Vietnam.


c. Ba collects stamps.


d. Liz’s aunt lives in New York.
e. The Robinsons moved to


Hanoi.


f. The Robinsons moved. Now
Ba is sad.


g. Ba will see Liz again.


<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

1. I ………. (see) a lot of beautiful fish at Tri Nguyen Aquarium.
2. They ………. (go) to Ha Long for their last summer vacation.
3. My friend ………. (take) me to see Tay Phuong pagoda.
4. We ………. (speak) to some American tourists.


5. She ………. (receive) a lot of gifts on her birthday.


6. Lan ………. (buy) a yellow cap, and she ………. (wear) it all day.
7. I ………. (be) in Ho Chi Minh for one week.



8. He ………. (return) to America for a short visit.
9. My teacher ………. (teach) me to love animals.


10. They ………. (be) very happy in Vietnam in spring festival.
<b>Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Learn by heart the vocabulary


<b>-</b> Do Exercise A3 in workbook page 54


<b>-</b> Prepare period 59: B1,2.


<b>Week 20 Period 59</b>

<b>Unit 9:</b>

<b>AT HOME AND AWAY </b>



<b>B</b>

<b>1,2</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Talk about past events.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Past simple tense with regular verbs. … away from …
* Vocabulary: In the text book


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>



<b> Warm up:</b> <b>Supply the correct verb form:</b>


1. I (go)…. to VungTau for last Tet holiday.
2. Mai (be) …….a student of class 6A.


<b>Answer :</b>


1. went 2. was 3.had


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<b>Presentation : </b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


3. She (have) ……..a lot of new friends in
Nha Trang.


4.We ………. (speak) to some American
tourists.


5.She ………. (receive) a lot of gifts on her
birthday.


6.Lan ………. (buy) a yellow cap,


- T introduces the new lesson by asking


students to look at the pictures and identify
the things which Lan and Hoa are
mentioning.(hair, dress)


- Let them listen to the dialogue once.
- Let them listen again and repeat after the
cassette.


- T asks: “What does Lan ask Hoa about?”
- Have them <b>practice in pairs, alternating</b>
<b>the roles.</b>


- Ask <b>two pairs</b> read the dialogue aloud.
- Ask them read silence and find out the
answers of A and B sentence.


1.What does Hoa’s aunt do?
2.What does Mrs. Mai do?


- And then T gives correct answers.


- T asks some questions to help students
practice speaking skill.


1. Are your neighbors friendly?
2. Do you sometimes help them?
3. Do they sometimes help you?
4. What do they do for you?
5. What do you do for them?
<b>B2</b>



<b> Answer</b>


- Let them read the sample sentences
and explain how to use them.


- Have them read the dialogue again,


<b>Vocabulary.</b>
- hair (n)


- . look (v) + different (adj)
- uncle (n)


- aunt (n)


- hairdresser (n)
- dressmaker (n)
- neighbor (n)
- material (n)
- clever (a)
- job (n)
<b>Answer B1.</b>


a.She is a hairdresser.


b. She is a dressmaker. (tailor)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

then ask and answer the questions <b>in</b>
<b>pairs.</b>



o “Yes, he did”


o “No, he didn’t”


- Check the answers with the students.
Use: Yes, he / she did.


No, he / she didn’t.
a. Did Hoa buy the dress?


b. Did her aunt make Hoa’s dress?
<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


<b>Write the questions with “Did…?” & give the answers with “Yes” or “No”.</b>
1. His uncle took him to see Cham temple. (No)


2. Liz bought a lot of souvenirs. (Yes)
<b>Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Learn the simple past tense by heart. (use, form)


<b>-</b> Do Exercise 1,2in workbook page 55


<b>-</b> Prepare period 60: B3, 4.


<b>Week 20 Period 60</b>

<b>Unit 9:</b>

<b>AT HOME AND AWAY </b>



<b>B</b>

<b>3,4</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>Talk about past events.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Past simple tense with regular verbs.


* Vocabulary: sewing, useful,hobby, decide………
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up:</b> WRITI<b> NG SOME VOCABULARIES</b>.


-Ask Sts to write some words on the board.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<b>Pre-reading : </b>


<b>While-reading : </b>


<b>Post-reading</b>:


<b>Pre-writing : B4</b>


<b>While-writing : </b>


<b>Post-writing</b>:



-T corrects.


*T introduces the new lesson and writes
down on the board.


- Read the dialogue B1 again, then ask
and answer with each other.


- Write some vocabularies.Reading the
new words in <b>chorally and</b>
<b>individually.</b>


- T reads the text the first time, students
listen.


- Students are asked to repeat sentence by
sentence after the teacher.


- Students find out the vocab, and then T
explains and presents them on the board.
- Ask some questions about some work
they like doing.


- Highlight the past form of the regular
verbs and the structure “learn how to…”
- Ask them to read the questions and find
the answers in the passage.


- Have them compare with a partner.
- Give the correct answers.



B4 Write. Put the verbs in brackets in the


simple past tense.


- Ask the students to remind the use, the
form of the simple past.


- Ask them to use the correct past form of
the verb to complete the sentences.


2.teach – taught
3. see – saw
* <b>Vocabulary</b>:
- sewing (n)
- useful (a)
- hobby (n)
- decide (v)


- learn how to + bare_inf
- cushion (n)


- skirt (n)
- fit (v)


- finally (adv)


<b>Questions</b>


a. Hoa learned how to sew.



b. She made a cushion for her
armchair.


c. It was blue and white.
d. She made a skirt next.


e. It was green with white flowers
on it.


f. It looked very pretty.
g. It didn’t fit her.


h. Her neighbor helped her.
i. It fitted very well finally.
<b> </b>


<b> Answer B4</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

- Let them check their sentences with their
partners.


- Let them take notes.


c.Cut d.Used
e.Decided/ was


f.Made / was / was not
g.Helped / fit



<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


<b>Supply the correct verb forms, use the simple past tense. </b>


1. They (play) soccer yesterday afternoon. 2. He (send) a letter to his pen pal last week.
3. She (teach) us English last year. 4. They (do) their homework carefully.


<b>Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Learn the simple past tense by heart. (use, form)


<b>-</b> Do Exercise B4 in workbook page 55


<b>-</b> -Prepare period 61: Language Focus 3


<b>Week 21 Period 61</b>

<b>Unit 9:</b>

<b>AT HOME AND AWAY </b>


<b> LANGUAGE FOCUS 3</b>






<b>I. Objectives:</b>Help the students revise all the structures and vocabulary they have already.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple present, present continuous, simple future
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>



<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up:</b> <b>Supply the correct verb forms, use the</b>
<b>simple past tense. </b>


1.They(play)…. soccer yesterday afternoon.
2. He (send)….. a letter to his pen pal last


<b>* Asking about the price</b>
<b>- Form</b>:


-How much is it?  It’s …


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b>Presentation : </b>
<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Activity 4</b>


<b>Activity 5</b>


week.


3. She (teach)….. us English last year.
4. They (do)…… their homework carefully.



- T introduces the new lesson after chcking
up.


- Teaching 1.How much..?
- T modals the dialogue.


- Guide the students to do exercise page 95
- T helps them how to solve the program.
- Asking the students to practice with one


another. <b>pair work</b>


- Teaching 2 the preposition.
- T reads..


- Guide the students to do exercise.
- <b> pair work</b>


- T helps them how to solve the program.
- Asking the students to practice .


- Teaching 3. the past simple tense.
- T modals .


- Guide the students to do exercise .
- T helps them how to solve the program.
A-sking the students to practice.


- Teaching 4. the simple tense.
- T modals .



- Guide the students to do exercise .
- T helps them how to solve the program.
-Asking the students to practice.


- Teaching 5. More less fewer.
- Teacher explains how to more…...
- T modals .


- Guide the students to do exercise .
- T helps them how to solve the program.
-Asking the students to practice


a.It’s 15.000 dong.
b.It’s 12.000 dong.
c.It’s 20.000 dong.
Prepositions


<i><b>Asking about the way</b></i>


 Could you tell me how to get
to the <i>shoe store</i>?


 It’s on NguyenHue street.
 It’s next to …


Asking about the distance
 How far is it from … to …?
It’s (about) … m/km



1.How far is it from the shoe
store to the minimart?


-It’s 500 m.


2.How far is it from the clothing
store to the bookstore?
-It’s 450 m.


<b>The past simple tense.</b>
a.helped ,remembered , took
b.talked- bought- worked- sent<b>. </b>
<b>The simple tense.</b>


Nga: help my mom…study ..
Minh……


Nga: cleaned my room, helped .
Minh……


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

<b>Homework</b> +Learn the structures and vocabulary by
heart .


+“Do Exercise Test yourself 3” in exercise
book page 59.


+Prepare period 62 (A1)<b> .</b>


.



<b>Week 21 Period 62</b>

<b>Unit 10:</b>

<b>HEALTH AND HYGIENE </b>



<b>A</b>

<b>1</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Give instructions and tell past events.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Present simple tense & past simple tense.


* Vocabulary: Take morning exercise, personal, hygiene, harvest, helpful, be bad for, probably
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up:</b> <b>Asking answering</b>


*Who went to school with you yesterday?
*What did you do yesterday?


*What do you do??


<b>Answer</b>:
1.miss Hoa.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

<b>Presentation : </b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2:</b>


<b>Activity 3:</b>


<b>Activity 4:</b>


T uses the picture to introduce the lesson.
- Sts look at the picture and guess the


content.


- Then T plays the tape again.
- Sts listen.


- Sts listen again and find new words
- T reads new words.


- T asks them to read new words.
- Sts repeat new words after teacher.


- Sts read new words in <b>chorally and</b>
<b>individually.</b>


- T plays the tape.


- Sts listen to the tape again.


- Then T asks them to read the letter.


- Sts read the letter.


- Sts answer the questions and write them
on the board.


- T can correct their mistakes.


- Sts correct the answers on their
exercise-book.


- And then T asks them some questions.
<b>pair work</b>


- T corrects.


<b>New words: </b>


-take morning exercise
-personal(adj)


-hygiene(n)
-harvest (n)
- helpful (adj)
-be bad for
-probably (adv)
- forget (v) forgot.


-take care of =look after (v)


<b>Questions:</b>



a.Because it’s almost harvest time.
b.Hoa’s grandmother helps them…..
c. They will go to HN soon.


d. now Hoa is different . She gets up
early ……


e.Hoa ‘s mother wants her to do.
……..


Hoa ‘s mother doesn’t want her to
eat ……. get up late.


<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


- T asks Sts some questions about them.
- Sts answer the questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

- T corrects the mistakes.
- Sts correct their mistakes.
<b>Homework:</b>


- Ask Sts to learn by heart new words.
- Ask Sts to prepare A2, 3 (pages 100).


<b>Week 21 Period 63</b>

<b>Unit 10:</b>

<b>HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>



<b>A</b>

<b>2, 3</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about personal hygiene.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Present simple tense.


* Vocabulary: iron, sandals, sandwich, polished
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up:</b>


<b>Pre-listening :</b>


WRITI<b> NG SOME VOCABULARIES</b>.


-Ask Sts to write some words on the board
into the simple past.


-T corrects.


- T uses the picture to introduce the lesson.
- Sts look at the picture and find out new


<b>Answer</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

<b> While-listening :</b>


<b>Post-listening :</b>


<b>Pre-reading :</b>


<b>While-reading :</b>


<b>Post-reading :</b>


words..


- Reads the instructions to the Sts.
- Listen to the teacher carefully.
- Let them look at the pictures.
- Look at the pictures and notice.


- Ask them to guess what pictures are
about.


- Guess what each picture is about.


- Let them listen to the tape twice and put
the pictures in order.


- Listen to the tape and put the pictures in
correct order.


- Have them listen again and check.


- Listen again and check.


- Have students read Nam’s diary and ask
some questions.


- Read Nam’s diary and ask some
questions.


- Ask them to write a diary in the same
style.


- Write a diary in the same style.


- Have them practice the dialogue in pair.
- Practice the dialogue <b>in pair.</b>


- Let them ask and answer questions about
each other’ routine.


- Ask and answer questions about each
other’ routine.


- Call on <b>some pairs</b> to role-play their
dialogue.


- <b>Some pairs role-play</b> their dialogue.


<b>Answer A2:</b>


<b>A , e , f, d, g, c, h, b.</b>



<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

- Sts write the letter (They can think about it).
- T corrects the mistakes.


- Sts correct their mistakes.
<b>Homework:</b>


- Ask Sts to learn by heart new words.


- Ask Sts to write the diary by themselves or their friends.
- Ask Sts to prepare A4 (pages 102).


- Do exercise 3 page 62


<b>Week 22 Period 64</b>

<b>Unit 10:</b>

<b>HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>



<b>A</b>

<b>4</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Guide students to read and write a letter in English.
- Talk about one’s life.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple present tense
Comparative adjectives.
* Vocabulary: Strange, careful



<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> Warm up: </b> <sub>Write the past form of the verbs</sub>


A. Regular B. Irregular
arrive ...


help ...
look ...
receive ...
remember ...
rent ...


be ...
have ...
go ...
take ...
buy ...
see ...


<b>Vocabulary</b>
-strange (a)
- careful (a)
- carefully (adv)


<b>Key</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<b>Pre-writing :</b>


<b>While-writing :</b>


<b>Post-writing :</b>


return ...
stop ...
talk ...
visit ...


think ...
wear ...
put ...
eat ...
speak ...
teach ...
give ...
get ...


*This is a letter Which Hoa writes to her
mother. She tells her mom some things about
her life in HaNoi.


*Have them read quickly and find out whose
letter it is and to whom it is sent.


- Have them read the letter which mom


writes to Hoa carefully.


- Let them read the letter individually.
- Have some read aloud


- T explains the meaning of the new
vocabulary.


*Let them read the letters and find the
missing words in the letter.


Translate into Vietnamese.


2. having
3. show
4. Take
5. get
6. go
7. wash
8. iron
9. eating
10. told
11. see
12. go


<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


I. Multiple choices.


1. You have to take care of ………… when you are away from home, Lan.



a) you b) yourself c) yourselves


2. I hope you ………… Vietnam some day.


a) will visit b) visiting c) to visit
3. Children shouldn’t go to bed ………….


a) late b) early c) soon


4. If you eat ………… candy, you’ll get a toothache.


a) many b) much c) a lot


5. He gets up early in the morning to ………… exercises.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

II. Rewrite in good English. Follow the model .
1. They are late never for school.


2. She usually brushes her teeth after meals.


3. Why do children afraid of going to see the dentist?
4. I have an appointment in 10:30 this morning.
5. What does she usually do in his free time?
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn vocabulary and do exercise 4 page 63
- Remember to prepare B1 for the next period (65)


<b>Week 22 Period 65</b>

<b>Unit 10:</b>

<b>HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>



<b>B</b>

<b>1</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about oral hygiene.


- Describe past events in a dentist’s.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple present tense. Why? Because…
* Vocabulary: Nouns: cavity, toothache, drill


Verbs: fill, fix, feel, check, forget, neglect, touch
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b> III. Multiple choices.


1.You have to take care of …… when you are
away from home, Lan.


a) you b) yourself c) yourselves


2I hope you ………… Vietnam some day.
a) will visit b) visiting c) to visit


3Children shouldn’t go to bed ………….
a) late b) early c) soon


Vocabulary
- toothache (n)
 have a toothache
- dentist (n)


-appointment (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<b>Presentation</b>:


<b>Activity 1:</b>


<b>Activity 2:</b>


<b>Activity 3:</b>


<b> Activity 4:</b>


.<b>Free-practice:</b>


4.If you eat ………… candy, you’ll get a
toothache.


a) many b) much c) a lot


- Have students brainstorm what they
should do if they have a toothache or what
the dentist does when they come to see


him/her.


- Ask some questions


- Let them listen the first time.


- Let them listen and repeat the dialogue.
- Ask them to find out the new vocabulary,


and then T presents them on the board
and explains them to the students.


- Have them practice in pairs.


- Let them role-play the dialogue in front of
the class.


- Ask students to read through the
questions, and then find the answers.
- Have some students give the answers


before the class.
- Give correct answers.
Questions:


1. What is wrong with Minh?


2. Does Minh like going to the dentist? How
do you know?



3. Why did Hoa go to the dentist last week?
4. What did the dentist do?


About you:


5. What did you do the last time you had a
bad toothache?


6. Are you scared of seeing the dentist?


- hate (v)
- sound (n)
- drill (n)
- loud (a)
- fill (v)
-cavity (n)
-hurt (v)


-afterwards (adv)


<b>Key:</b>


1.Minh has a toothache.


2.No, he doesn’t. The loudness
of the drill scares him.


3.Because she had a toothache.
(She had a cavity filled.)



4She filled the cavity in her
teeth.


5.I went to the dentist.
6.No, I am not.


<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

1. Hoa …………. (brush) her teeth twice a day.


2. She …………. (forget) to brush her teeth yesterday.


3. Last week the doctor …………. (fill) a cavity in my eighth tooth.
4. We usually …………. (wash and iron) our clothes every week.
5. <b>Homework :</b>


- Learn vocabulary and do homework.


- -Remember to prepare B2, 3 for the next period (66)




<b>Week 22 </b>

<b>Period 66</b>

<b>Unit 10:</b>

<b>HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>



<b>B</b>

<b>2, 3</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about oral hygiene.



- Describe past events in a dentist’s.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple present tense


* Vocabulary: advice, explain, remind, sensible
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b> <b>Multiple choices. </b>


1I hope you ………… Vietnam some day.
a) will visit b) visiting c) to visit
2.Children shouldn’t go to bed ………….
a) late b) early c) soon
3.If you eat ………… candy, you’ll get a
toothache.


a) many b) much c) a lot


4.He gets up early in the morning to …………
exercises.


<b>Vocabulary</b>
- advice (n)
-explain (v)


-remind (v)
-sensible (a)


<b>Key:</b>


1. She is a dentist.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

<b> Pre- listening</b>


<b>Pre- listening</b>
<b>Pre- listening</b>


<b>Presentations:</b>
<b>Activity 1:</b>


<b>Activity 2:</b>


<b>Activity 3:</b>


a) play b) make c) do


- Let them look at the picture and tell what
is happening in the picture.


- Have them read questions from a. to d.
- Let them listen to the tape and note the


information needed for the answers.


- Have students listen to the tape again to


check their answers.


- Help students understand the content of
the listening by giving them a table.


Dr. Lai’s job
Dr. Lai’s clothes
How do children help


Dr. Lai helps them Explains…
Gives…
Tells…
Reminds…
Eat …


- Call on some students to give the answers
in front of the class.


- Give correct answers and let them listen
to the tape again to check the answers.
Questions:


1. What is Dr. Lai’s job?


2. What clothes does Dr. Lai wear to work?
3. How do most children feel when they come
to see Dr. Lai?


4. How does Dr. Lai help these children?
- Ask some questions about Minh.



a. What is the matter with Minh?
b. How does he feel?


c. What is the dentist doing?


4. She explains what will
happen. She gives them advice.
She tells them how to look after
their teeth and she reminds
them to clean their teeth
regularly and eat sensibly.


<b> </b>


<b> NEW WORDS:</b>
Surgery (n)
Smile (v)
Serious (adj)
Sensible (n)
<b>ANSWER:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

d. Why does that happen to Minh?
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn vocabulary and do homework.


- Remember to prepare B4, 4, 6 for the next period (67)


<b>Week 23 </b>

<b>Period 67</b>

<b>Unit 10:</b>

<b>HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>



<b>B</b>

<b>4, 5, 6</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Talk about oral hygiene.


- Describe past events in a dentist’s.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple present tense


* Vocabulary: Touch, unhealthy, neglect.
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity 1:</b>


IV. <b>Multiple choices. </b>


1I hope you ………… Vietnam some day.
a) will visit b) visiting c) to visit


2.Children shouldn’t go to bed ………….
a) late b) early c) soon


- Have students retell what happens to
Minh in B3.


- Let them observe picture (A) and the
model exchange.


- Minh’s tooth hurts.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

<b>Activity 2:</b>


<b>Activity 3:</b>


<b> Activity 4:</b>


- Why?


- Because he has a cavity.


- Let them observe the remaining pictures
and prepare the dialogues in pairs.


- Have them practice with their partner.
- Have some pairs role-play the dialogue in


front of the class.


- Explain how to do this exercise.



- Let them observe the first picture and the
examples given.


- Ask them to write the sentences in their
exercise notebook.


- Have students compare their sentences
with a partner.


- Let them give answers in class.


- Retell the main structures and new words.
- Guide them to read better and better.
<b>Homework:</b>


-Ask students to do exercise B3, 4 page 64 & 65


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>



<b> Week 23</b>

<b> Period 68</b>



<b>Unit 11:</b>

<b>KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY </b>



<b>A</b>

<b>1</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Give order / instruction.



- Follow / respond to doctor’s instruction during a check up.
- Read and fill out a medical form.


- Talk about one’s height, weight.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple past tense & simple past.
Would you + verb …?


* Vocabulary: Have a medical check-up, medical record, temperature, measure, scales, normal,
and waiting room.


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


Warm up:


Presentation:
Practice


Controlled practice:


V. <b>Multiple choices. </b>


1.If you eat ………… candy, you’ll get a
toothache.



a) many b) much c) a lot


2.He gets up early in the morning to …………
exercises.


a) play b) make c) do


- Let students look at the pictures and ask
questions.


- Have them read the dialogue themselves.
- Explain new words and expressions.
- Ask some questions


- Let them listen the first time.


- Let them listen and repeat the dialogue.
- Ask them to find out the new vocabulary,


and then T presents them on the board


<b>New words:</b>
Check-up (v)


 have a medical check-up
A medical record (n)
Follow me (v)


Temperature (n)


Mouth (n)


37o<sub>C = 37centigrade degree</sub>


Normal (a)
Measure (v)
Height (n)
Scales (n)
Weigh (v)
 weight (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

Free practice:


Concept checking:


and explains them to the students.
- Have them practice in pairs.


- Let them role-play the dialogue in front of
the class.


- Ask students to read through the
questions, and then find the answers.
- Have some students give the answers


before the class.
- Give correct answers


Key
6a


8b
3c
2d
5e
1f
4g
7h


<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


Matching column A with column B


A B


1. What’s the matter?


2. Who did you go to the cinema with
last night?


3. When did Nam go to the dentist?
4. What’s his weight?


5. How can you take care of your teeth?
6. Why didn’t Lan go to school?


7. Who wrote Lan’s sick note?
8. Where were you yesterday?


a. He is 38 kilos



b. Because she was ill.


c. I brush my teeth after every meal.
d. Her mother.


e. I have a headache.
f. I stayed at home.


g. With some of my friends.
h. A week ago.


<b>Homework:</b>


1. Learn the lesson carefully.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

4. Prepare the period 69.


<b> Week 23 Period 69</b>

<b>Unit 11:</b>

<b>KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>



<b>A</b>

<b>2,3</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Read and fill out a medical form.
- Talk about one’s height, weight.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple past tense & simple past.


* Vocabulary: Forenames, surname, male, female, gender


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b> Warm up: </b>


<b>Pre- listening :</b>


<b>Pre- listening :</b>


<b>Pre- listening:</b>
<b> Presentation: </b>


<b>ASKING</b>


*Let students look at the pictures and ask
some questions: “How many people are there
in the picture?” “Who are they?”


*Have them read the dialogue the first time
and make guesses on the missing words.


*Let them listen the first time.
- Let them listen the second time.


- Ask them to fill the missing words in the
blanks.



- Ask some students to give their answers
in front of the class.


*Let them listen to the tape again and
provide the correct answers.


- Guide the students how to do this kind of


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


exercise.


*Have students <b>work in pairs</b>.


- Let them work together to cover each
one’s form and vice versa.


- Remind the students of using the models
as guides to carry out the exercise.


*T gives students some models so that they
can practice easier.


1. Which school / class are you in?
2. What’s your forenames / surname?
3. Where do you live?



4. What’s your gender?


5. How old / heavy / tall are you?
- Give corrections if necessary.
<b>Consolidation</b>:<b> </b>


Exercise: Write the question for the answer.
1. I am 45 kilograms.


2. They are 15 years old.


3. The nurse took Hoa’s temperature.


4. I visited the dentist because I had a terrible toothache.
<b>Homework:</b>


1. Learn the lesson carefully.


2. Write “Remember” in your notebook (irregular verbs)
3. Do the exercises A2 in the workbook page 69.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<b>Week 24 Period 70</b>

<b>Unit 11:</b>

<b>KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>


<b>B</b>

<b>1</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


-Ask and answer about one’s health conditions. -Identify illnesses and diseases and their symtomps.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>



* Grammar: Simple past tense


* Vocabulary: Have a bad cold, have a headache, sick, a little tired, stay inside, awful, sick note, <b>III. </b>
<b>Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Presentation:</b>


<b> Controlled </b>


Write the past form of the verbs


A. Regular B. Irregular
arrive ...


help ...
look ...
receive ...
remember ...
rent ...
return ...
stop ...
talk ...
visit ...



be ...
have ...
go ...
take ...
buy ...
see ...
think ...
wear ...
put ...
eat ...
speak ...
teach ...
give ...
get ...


- This is Mr.Tan and this is Lan, his pupil.
Yesterday, Lan was absent, so Mr. Tan
asks her what was wrong with her.


- You will hear a dialogue between Mr.Tan
and Lan so that you can know the reason
why Lan was absent.


- T controls the tape.


<b>New words:</b>
- Have a bad cold
- Have a headache
- Sick (n)



- How do you feel now?
- A little tired


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

<b>Practice:</b>


<b> Free practice:</b>


- Students listen the first time.
- T turns on the tape again.
- Students listen the second time.


- Students listen and repeat sentence by
sentence.


- T asks the students to find out the new
words.


- T presents on the board and explains
them.


- Students pratice reading the words after
listening.


- Students read silence to get information.
- Students practice asking and answering


the questions.
- Working in pairs.



- T gives the correct answers.


Key:


1. Because she had a bad
cold.


2. She had a headache.


3. He tells Lan to stay inside at
recess.


4. The doctor said that Lan had
a virus.


5. The doctor wrote Lan’s sick
note.


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn the lesson carefully.


- Write “Remember” in your notebook


- Do the exercises 1 in the workbook page 71.


- Prepare the period 71.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

<b>B</b>

<b>2</b>

<b>, </b>

<b>3</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Help them listen and talk about some diseases.
- Fill in check-up forms.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple past tense


* Vocabulary: Stomachache, cold, absent, semester, headache, flu, toothache
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


- <b>Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board.Divide the class into two groups.</b>
- <b>Group has more idea that is winner.</b>


- Teacher asks them some questions about


B1to introduce the new lesson.


-They answer the questions and guess the
content


- Have students draw the table and read
the survey questions.


- Listen and try to find the answers.


- Work in group of 4 and complete the
survey.


- Try to fill the table with complete details
- Some representatives work


- Ask them the questions to give models.


<b> COLD</b>


<b> </b>


<b> sickness</b>
<b>NEW WORDS;</b>
sneeze (v)


stomach (n) stomachache(n)
be absent from



disease (n)
flu (n)


semester (n)
<b>ANSWER:</b>


- <b>Cold: 10 </b>
- <b>Flu; 43</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

<b>Activity 3</b>


- Check the answers while listening to the
cassette.


- Give answers in front of the class.
- Check the answers.


*B 3. Listen. Then complete the table:


- Let students draw the table.


- Have them listen to the tape once.


- Let them listen again and complete the
table.


- Play the tape again for the students to
check their answers.



- Call on some students to give answers.
Give correct answers.


<b> Consolidation : Exercise1: Choose the best answer</b>
1. What was ………….. with her.


a) problem b) matter c) wrong


2. I …………. a bad cold.


a) to have b). had c) has


3. The weather ………… awful today.


a) is b) are c) was


4. Did your mom write a sick note for you?


a) Yes, she didn’t b) No, she did c) No, she didn’t
5. How ………… you feel now?


a) do b) does c) did


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully. Write “Remember” in your notebook
- Do the exercises 2 ,3 in the workbook page 72. Prepare the B4.


<b> </b>



<b> </b>

<b>Week 24 </b>

<b>Period 72</b>

<b>Unit 11:</b>

<b>KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Help them to know the common cold.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple present tense, model verb
* Vocabulary:


- Nouns: Disease, million, symptom, fever, coughing, sneezing,
- Verb : disappear, present,


- Adjectives : slight, common, runny


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Pre- reading :</b>


<b>While- reading :</b>


<b>Post- reading :</b>



<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
- <b>Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
* B 4. Read. Then answer the questions


- Teacher asks them some questions
about B4to introduce the new lesson.


*Let them read the passage themselves.
- Explain/ Elicit difficult words.


- Let them read the questions and find
the answers in the passage.<b>in pair</b>
- Call on <b>some pairs</b> to give the answers


in front of the class.
- Listen and note.


- Read the questions and find the
answers in the passage.


*Some students do as requested.
- Check the answers


- Give correct answers.


<b> TOOTHACHE</b>



<b> </b>


<b> DISEASE</b>
<b>NEW WORDS;</b>
relieve (v)
symptom (n)
runny nose(n)
fever (v, n)
cough ( v,n)
medicine (n)
appear (v)
disappear (v)
cure (v)


<b>ANSWER:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

B, They are runny nose, aslight
fever, coughingand sneezing.
C, No, there is no cure for the
common cold.


D, No, these medicines don’t cure
acold, but they relieve the
symptoms.


E,We can prevent acold by eating
well, doing exercise , keeping
fitand staying healthy.



<b> Consolidation : Exercise1: Choose the best answer</b>
6. What was ………….. with her.


a) problem b) matter c) wrong


7. I …………. a bad cold last week.


a) have b). had c) has


8. The weather ………… awful today.


a) are b) is c) was


9. Did your father write a sick note for you?


a) Yes, she didn’t b) No, she did c) No, he didn’t
10. How ………… you feel now?


a) do b) does c) did


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully. Write “Remember” in your notebook
- Do the exercises 4 in the workbook page 72. Prepare the B4.


<b> Week 25 </b>

<b>Period 73</b>

<b>Unit 12:</b>

<b>LET’S EAT</b>


<b>A</b>

<b>1</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<b>I. Objectives: </b>Identify kinds of food: meat, vegetables, and fruits. Behavior: helping the students to
choose the healthy and hygienic food.



<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Revision: simple prese , past tenses.Introducing: the adverbs: Neither / either / so / Too
* Vocabulary: (n)Stall selection, pork, display, spinach, cucumber, papaya, pineapple, durian,


ripe neither, either, so, too, (v)smell


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a cirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board.Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
T. reviews the food which the students have
studied.



T gives some words and asks students to
arrange them into columns: meat,
vegetables, and fruits.


New lesson:


-T introduces the situations of the three
dialogues by illustrating pictures. (on the
screen)


-T asks students to look at the picture and
answer the question:T: What is it?


S: It’s the market.
<i>“Yesterday, Hoa and her aunt went to</i>
<i>the market. First, they went to the meat stall.</i>
<i>Next, they went to the vegetable stall. And</i>


<b> BEEF</b>
<b> </b>


<b> FOOD</b>


*Arrange the words into columns:
meat, vegetables and fruits:


Apple, beef, carrot, chicken, orange,
pea, banana, onion, potato, lemon.



Meat Vegetables Fruits
beef


chicken


carrot
pea
onion
potato


apple
orange
banana
lemon
- T corrects if any.


<b>NEW WORDS;</b>
- Stall (n) quầy hàng.
- selection (n) sự lựa chọn.
- pork (n) thịt heo


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

<b>Activity :3</b>


<b>Activity :4</b>


<b>Homework:</b>


<i>finally, they stopped at a fruit one.”</i>


→What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the


market?


And now you are going to study Unit 12,
lesson A1 to know what they bought at the
market.


-T presents the first picture on the screen
“meat stall”.


-T asks students to close their books, look at
the screen and listen to the teacher.


-“First, Hoa and her aunt went to the first
stall. What are there at the first stall?”


-Students look at the picture and listen to the
teacher.


-“Next, they went to the vegetable stall. What
kinds of vegetables did they like?”


-T asks students to listen and repeat once.
T has students look at the pictures and
answer the questions


*Learn new words carefully.


-Do the exercises 1 in the workbook page 74.
- Prepare the A2,4,5.



<b>Ex</b>: I don’t like pork. Neither do I. (I
don’t either)


- display (n) sự trưng bày
- spinach (n) rau chân vịt
- cucumber (n) quả dưa chuột
- so (adv) cũng vậy = too


<b>Ex</b>: I like spinach. so do I (I do, too)
- Papaya (n) quả đu đủ


- pineapple (n) quả dứa
- ripe (adj) chín


- durian (n) quả sầu riêng
- smell (v) ngửi (có mùi)


<b>Week 25 </b>

<b>Period 74</b>

<b>Unit 12:</b>

<b>LET’S EAT</b>



<b>A</b>

<b>2</b>

<b>, </b>

<b>4</b>

<b>, </b>

<b>5</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

- Behavior: helping the students to choose the healthy and hygienic food.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Revision: simple present and simple past tenses.
Introducing: the adverbs: Neither / either / so / Too
* Vocabulary: (n)steam, balance. (v) treat .



<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity :3</b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a cirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board.Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
 New lesson:


 A2:T introduces the new structures with


the adverbs: so, too, either, neither.


- Use the models to ask them questions
and have them answer aloud.



T: I like pineapples. Do you like them?
S: Yes, I like pineapples, too./Yes, so do I
- Let them work <b>in pairs.</b>Talk about the


different foods they like and dislike.
- Let <b>two pairs</b> work in front of the class.
 A4:


Write. What did you eat and drink yesterday.
- For breakfast, I ate … I drank …
- For lunch, I …


- For dinner, I


- Ask students to write sentences about
what they had for breakfast, lunch and
dinner.


- Let them compare their sentences with a
partner.


- Ask two students to read aloud and write


<b> BEEF</b>


<b> </b>


<b> FOOD</b>
<b>NEW WORDS:</b>


steam (n)
balance (v)
treat (v)
Grammar:


 Responses with “so”, “too”,
“either” and “neither”


 Cách dùng “so” và “too” (cũng vậy,
cũng thế)


Chúng ta dùng “so” và “too” khi
đồng ý với một ý kiến khẳng định.




Đối với động từ TOBE
<b>So</b> + be + Subject


Subject + be, <b>too</b>


Ex: He is hungry. She is hungry.
She is, too. / So is she.




Đối với động từ thường
<b>So</b> + aux. V + Subject


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

<b>Activity :4</b>



<b>Homework:</b>


their sentences to the whole class.
- Make corrections if there are mistakes.
 A5:


* Play with words


Guide the whole class to read well.
<b>Consolidation:</b>


<b>Exercise:</b> Complete the following sentences,
<b>using “so, too, either, neither”.</b>


1.They’ve got a color TV. ……… we.
2.We live in a small flat, and they …………
3.Mary didn’t know the answer to the
teacher’s question. Tom ………
4.Tam plays chess well. ………… Minh.
5.Mr.Nam didn’t win the race. …… Mr.Bang.


*Learn by heart all new words.


-Do exercise 2,3 pages 74 in workbook.


-Prepare period 75 (A3)


He does, too. / So does he.
Ex2: He can swim. She can swim.



He can, too. / So can she.


 Cách dùng “Either” và “Neither”
(cũng không, cũng vậy)


Dùng Either và neither khi đồng ý với
một ý kiến phủ định.




Đối với động từ TOBE


<b>Neither</b> + be + Subject
Subject + be + not, <b>either</b>


Ex: He isn’t hungry. She isn’t hungry.
She isn’t, either. / Neither is she.




Đối với động từ thường


<b>Neither</b> + aux. V + Subject
Subject + aux.V + not, <b>either</b>


Ex1: They didn’t like soccer. He didn’t
like soccer.


He didn’t, either. / Neither did he.


Ex2: He won’t come to the party. She
won’t come to the party.


<b>Week 25 </b>

<b>Period 75</b>

<b>Unit 12:</b>

<b>LET’S EAT</b>


<b>A</b>

<b>3</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Identify kinds of food: meat, vegetables, and fruits.


- Behavior: helping the students to choose the healthy and hygienic food.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Revision: simple present and simple past tenses.
Introducing: the adverbs: Neither / either / so / Too
* Vocabulary:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Pre- reading :</b>


<b>While- reading :</b>


<b>Post- reading :</b>



<b>*Complete the following sentences</b>, <b> </b>
<b>using “so, too, either, neither”.</b>


1.They’ve got a color TV. ……… we.
2.We live in a small flat, and they …………
3.Mary didn’t know the answer to the
teacher’s question. Tom ………
4.Tam plays chess well. ………… Minh.
5.Mr.Nam didn’t win the race. …… Mr.Bang
 New lesson:


- T introduces the new lesson by hanging
three pictures on the board and then
explains them to the students.
- Ask them some questions which are


mentioned to three pictures. And then, T
teaches new lesson.


- T reads the first time.


- Students are asked to repeat once.
- Let them read the text themselves.
- T helps them to find out the new words.
- T guides them how to read vocabulary.
- Ask some students to read the text


aloud to the class. (each student for one
paragraph)



- Have <b>two pairs role-play</b> the dialogue
in class.


- Ask them to give answer to the
questions given.


- Let them identify the food Hoa and her
aunt and her uncle had for dinner.


 Finally, T asks the class to practice the
question: “What did Hoa, her aunt and
uncle has for dinner?”


<b>NEW WORDS;</b>
-slice (v)


-pepper (n)
-onion (n)
-boil (v)
-add (v)
-a little salt
-taste (v)
-heat (v)
-pan (n)
-stir-fry (v)
-soy sauce (n)
-set the table (v)
-bowl (n)



-chopsticks (pl.n)
-spoon (n)


<b>Key:</b>


1. Slice the beef.


2. Slice the green peppers
and onions.


3. Heat the pan.
4. Stir-fry the beef.


5. Add some soy sauce to the
dish.


6. Boil / cook rice.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

 A3 (Matching):


- Have students <b>work in pairs.</b>


- Ask students to add the missing verbs
to the instructions.


- Ask students to match the instructions
to the pictures.


- Call on some students to give the
answer in front of the class.



- Give correct answers.
<b>Exercise1: Which word is the odd one out?</b>


1. Chicken beef carrot port


2. Carrot pineapple potato pea


3. Corn papaya pineapple orange


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Write “Remember” in your notebook


- Do the exercises 4 in the workbook page 75.
- Prepare the B4.


<b>Week 26 </b>

<b>Period 76</b>

<b>Unit 12:</b>

<b>LET’S EAT</b>



<b>B</b>

<b>1</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Identify healthy food.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple present.
* Vocabulary: Spinach(n), dirt(n)



<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b> <b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity3 :</b>


<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
-Ask students to tell what is in the picture
on the page.


-Let them guess what problem Ba was
having and why he has the problem.


-Let them listen to the dialogue twice.
-Have them listen and repeat.



-Let them <b>practice in pairs</b> alternating
roles.


-Call on <b>some pairs to role-play</b> the
dialogue in front of the class.


-Have students read the paragraph
themselves.


-Let them refer to the dialogue and
complete the paragraph.


-Have them compare the answers with their
partner.


-Call two students to read aloud the
completed paragraph in front of the class.


-Make any necessary correction.


<b> </b>


<b> DISEASE</b>
<b>NEW WORDS;</b>


-terrible(adj) I feel terrible.
It must be something.


It was probably the spinach.


Dirt (n) dirty (adj)


That dirt can make you sick.
<b>ANSWER:</b>


1 doctor 2. sick
3. asked 4. had
5.spinach 6.wash
7. more carefully 8. vegetable
9. make 10 she
11. medicine


<b> Consolidation : Exercise1: Choose the best answer</b>
1.What ‘s the……….. , Ba?.


a) problem b) matter c) wrong
2.I …………. a bad cold last week.


a) have b). had c) has


3I ………… an awful stomachache.


a)have b) is c) has


4Did Ba eat spinach last night?


a) Yes, he didn’t b) No, he did c) No, he didn’t
5How ………… you feel now?


a) do b) does c) did



<b>Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

<b>-</b> Learn by heart new words.


<b>-</b> Do exercises 1 in workbook page 76.
Prepare B2(new words , questions)


<b>Week 26 </b>

<b>Period 77</b>

<b>Unit 12:</b>

<b>LET’S EAT</b>



<b>B</b>

<b>2</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Identify healthy food.


- Talk about good health habits.
- Talk about diet.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Revision: simple present.
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity3 :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
 New lesson:


 B2:


- T introduces the new lesson by asking
students some questions about the food
they’d like to eat.


- Let them listen to the tape twice.
- Elicit new difficult words in the text.
- <b>Work in pairs</b>


- Have them read the passage .


- Call on two students to read it aloud to
the class.


- <b>Work in pairs</b> to ask and answer the


questions .


- Ask them to answer.


- Have them compare their answers with
their friends.


- Call on some students to give the
answers in front of the class.


- Give correct answers.


<b> </b>


<b> FOOD</b>
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


- a balanced diet (n) chế độ ăn uống
cân đối.


- affect (n) ảnh hưởng
- life (n) cuộc đời
- lifestyle (n) lối sống
- For example: ví dụ
- add (v) thêm vào


- moderate amount (n) số lượng vừa
phải


- moderation (n) sự điều độ


- energy (n) sức lực, năng lực


- dairy product (n) sản phẩm bơ sữa
- body-building food (n) thức ăn bồi
bổ cơ thể


- stay fit and healthy (v) cân đối và
khỏe mạnh


- guideline (n) chỉ dẫn
-advantage(n)


disadvantage(n)
Key:


1.Sugar adds taste to the food and
gives you energy.


2.No, it isn’t. A balanced diet alone is
not enough. All people need exercise
to keep a healthy life.


3. Yes, I do. Because I feel healthier
and healthier when I eat the
moderation like now.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

Exercise: Multiple choices


1. Would you like some corn? ………..



A. Yes, please B. Here it is C. OK, I’ll have some corn
2. I don’t like durians ………..


A. too B. either C. neither


3. What vegetables would you like ……… dinner.


A. for B. in C. to


4. My nephew doesn’t like carrots. ……….


A. I don’t like too B. I don’t like neither C. Neither do I
<b>Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Read the dialogue more carefully at home.


<b>-</b> Learn by heart new words.


<b>-</b> Do exercises 2 in workbook page 77.
Prepare B4,5(new words , questions)


<b>Week 26 </b>

<b>Period 78</b>

<b>Unit 12:</b>

<b>LET’S EAT</b>



<b>B</b>

<b>3</b>

<b>, </b>

<b>4</b>

<b>, </b>

<b>5</b>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Identify healthy food.


- Talk about good health habits.


- Talk about diet.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Revision: simple present.
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b> <b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>


<b> Sticky rice</b>


<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

<b>Activity : </b>


<b>Pre-listening</b>


<b>While-listening</b>


<b>Post-listening</b>



<b>Activity :</b>


<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
 New lesson:


 B3:


- Ask students to write a menu for them
and their family.


- Let them study the pie chart.


- Have them write a menu for breakfast,
lunch and dinner by choosing the items
in the pictures.


- Tell students to compare their menus
with a partner.


- Have two students write their menus
with a partner.


 B4:


- Have students study the pictures for a
few minutes.


- Let them listen to the tape twice.



- Have them listen again and write the
letters of what Lan, Nga, Ba and Hoa
ate and drank.


- Call on some students to give the
answers in front of the class.


- Ask students to copy the sentences in
“Remember”


 B5: Play with words


T helps students how to pronounce and


<b>-Bread ;Milk Fish;Vegetables;Rice</b>
<b>Fruit juice;lemonade, apple juice</b>
<b>Chicken ; beef ; pork ;Rice. </b>
<b>Tape</b>


For her lunch, Lan had beef
with noodles and vegetables. She
had juice, too. Ba chooses fish and
rice and some fruit. He drank some
water. Nga ate rice and vegetables
and drank juice. Hoa had noodles and
some fruit. She had juice, too.


<b>Lan: b, d, f, g</b>
<b>Ba: c, a, e, h</b>
<b>Nga: a, d, g</b>


<b>Hoa: b, e, g</b>


Should + bare_inf
Ought to + bare_inf


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

then students read in chorus.
<b> Consolidation :</b>


<b>Exercise: Multiple choices</b>


1. Would you like some corn? ………..


A. Yes, please B. Here it is C. OK, I’ll have some corn
2. What do you often have for lunch?


A. rice and fish B. book C. cap
5. What vegetables would you like ……… dinner.


A. for B. in C. to


6. My nephew doesn’t like carrots. ……….


A. I don’t like too B. I don’t like neither C. Neither do I
<b>Homework:</b>


<b>-</b> Read the dialogue more carefully at home.


<b>-</b> Learn by heart new words.


<b>-</b> Do exercises 3 in workbook page 78.


Prepare ; language focus.


<b>Week 27 </b>

<b>Period 79</b>

<b>Unit 12:</b>

<b>LET’S EAT</b>


<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS 4</b>




<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Help the students revise all the structures and vocabulary they have already learnt.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple present, present continuous, simple past
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>sub board, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up:</b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>*Circle the correct answer</b>
- T gives the exercise .


- <b>Sts complete in pair.</b>



*T asks Sts some words or some
questions to help remember the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Activity 4</b>


<b>Activity 5</b>


previous knowledge.


- T asks them to read new words.


- T asks them about time; present
progressive tense; this; that; these;
those; subjects.


- T introduces exercises.


- Then T corrects.


-T uses real thing to help them practice
about “Indefinite quantifiers:


-Write the correct expression:



-Ta dùng “a little” trước danh từ không
đếm được và “a few” trước danh từ đếm
được số nhiều.


Ex: a little coffee
a few apples


-Ta dùng “a lot of / lots of” trước cả hai
loại danh từ đếm được số nhiều và không
đếm được.


Ex: a lot of tea
lots of salt


-Ta dùng “too much” trước danh từ không
đềm được


Ex: too much water


<b>-</b>Then T uses pictures about the sujects.
<b>Work in pair or group.</b>


- T asks them to go to the board &
writethree sentences about Ba.


- <b>Work in pair.</b>


- T asks Sts to make suggestions.


4 Did Ba eat spinach last night?


a) Yes, he didn’t b) No, he did
c) No, he didn’t


5How ………… you feel now?
a) do b) does c) did
<b>1. Past simple tense.</b>


<b>Answer the questions </b>


b.No, I didn’t. I had dinner in a
restaurant.


c.No, I didn’t. I went to the movie
theater yesterday.


d.No, I didn’t. I raed a book on the
weekent.


e.No, I didn’t. I played football
yesterday.


<b>2.Indefinite quantifiers</b>


<b>A. Write the correct expression.</b>
B.a lot of tea. C. a little sugar.
D. a lot of salt. D. too much coffee.
<b>B. complete the dialogue.</b>


A. a littleor a lot. Only alittle.
B. a lot of C.too much D. a little


2. Imperatives


Complete the instructions


Add mix peel slice stir wait wash


A .Peel the onions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

<b>Activity 6</b>


<b>Homework</b>


- T uses somes pictures to help them
practise. . <b>Work in pair</b>


- T can correct their pronunciation.


- Ask them to do homework carefully.


- Ask them to look at the pictures to say
about the pictures.


*T writes some exercises to help them
to do at home.


- Learn the old words . the structures
to make the TEST 3.


onions.



C.<b>Slice</b> the cucumbers and the
onions.


D.<b>Mix</b> the slices.


E.<b>Add </b>a little salt, sugar and vinegar
to the mixture.


F.<b>Stir</b> the mixture.


G.<b>Wait </b>for five minutes and the
salad is ready to serve.


<b>Week 27 Period 80</b>



<b>TEST ENGLISH 3</b>



<b>I. Objectives: </b>T can check up and appreciate the knowledge, ability of the students, so T should Help Sts
remember about the the knowledge. Students must find the best way to learn if they are not good.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: . Present continuous tense, Simple present tense, Future simple tense; Pst simple tense. Too,


Either, So, Neither; indefinite quantifiers , imperative& they can do th

e

exercises.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>



<b> Week 27 </b>

<b>Period 81</b>

<b>Unit 13:</b>

<b>ACTIVITIES</b>


<b>A</b>

<b>1</b>

<b>, </b>

<b>2</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


<b>-</b> Students learn how to describe and talk about sports and other entertainments.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: <i>Revision</i>: Adverbs and adjectives.


<b>* </b><i>Vocabulary</i><b>:</b> baseball (n) skateboarding (n) roller-skating (n)
<b>III. Techniques: Picture drills, pair work, role plays</b>


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
 New lesson:


 <b>A1</b>:



-Introduce the topic.


-Ask students which sports are their
favorite ones and when in their free time


<b> Swimming</b>


<b> </b>


<b> SPORTS</b>
<i><b>Vocab</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity3 :</b>


which one they often play.


-Let them look at the pictures indicating
sports.


-Tell them the content of the reading they
are going to listen and read.


-Name 10 sports which are the most
popular that the young in America love to
play.



-Let students listen to the cassette twice.
-Ask them to read by themselves.


-Call some students and ask them to tell
the name of some sports listed in the
reading.


-Ask students if they know how to play any
of these 10 sports.


-Let them pratice <b>in pairs</b>, asking and
answering the questions given.


-Call <b>some pairs</b> to drill before class,
correct if there is any mistakes.


-Ask them to take notes.
 <b>A2</b>


-This practice is done continuously after the
first part.


-Ask students to make a chart in which the
names of the ten sports are written, let and
complete the chart. Question used “Which
sport do you like best?”


-Call some students and ask them to say
their number of students joining in each
sport or liking each sport.



- football (n) bóng đá


- volleyball (n) bóng chuyền
- tennis (n) quần vợt


- badminton (n) cầu long
- swimming (n) bơi lội


- teenager (n) thanh thiếu niên (13-19)
- result (n) kết quả


- even though (conj) mặc dầu
- surprising (a) đáng ngạc nhiên
- surprisingly (adv) một cách ngạc
nhiên


<b> Consolidation :</b>


<i>Exercise1: </i>Write the adverbs corresponding to the


adjectives. The first one is <sub>Good</sub>Adjectives Adverb done for you.
Bad


Slow
Quick
Safe
Skillful
Sudden
dangerous



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

<i>Exercise2: </i>Complete the sentences. The first one is done for you.
1. My brother is a good badminton player. He plays well.


2. Lan’s sister is a quick swimmer. She swims ………
3. Na’s father is a safe driver. He drives ………
4. I’m a bad swimmer. I swim ………


5. Hoa’s aunt is a slow runner. She runs ………


6. Minh’s brother is a skillful tennis player. He plays ………
<b>Homework</b>


- learn by heart the new words.


<b>-</b> Do exercise 1 page 82 in workbook.


<b>-</b> Prepare: (A3, 5) period 82 ( <b>New words, Questions ; adj , adv)</b>


<b> Week 28</b>

<b> </b>

<b>Period 82</b>

<b>Unit 13:</b>

<b>ACTIVITIES</b>


<b>A</b>

<b>3</b>

<b>, </b>

<b>5</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


<b>-</b> Students learn how to describe and talk about sports and other entertainments.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: <i>Revision</i>: Adverbs and adjectives.



* Vocabulary: (adj)Skillful ,,awareness . (n)kid ,lifeguard. (v)improve
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
 New lesson:


 Ask students to look at the pictures,
observe and then tell what people in the
picture do.


 Let students listen to the cassette twice.
 Ask questions and let htem answer.


o “What’s he?”



<b> Swimming</b>


<b> </b>


<b> SPORTS</b>
<b>NEW WORDS</b>
-Skillful (a)


-improve (v) cải thiện
-awareness (n) nhận thức
-kid (n) trẻ con, nhóc con
-lifeguard (n) nhân viên cứu hộ
-stay away (v) tránh xa


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity3 :</b>


o “Is he good at soccer?”


o “Is he a good soccer player?”


o “What does he play?”


o “How does he play soccer?”
 Use substitution drill and let students


work on other pictures.


 Have students <b>practice in pairs.</b>



 Write 6 pairs of sentences on the board
and call some students to underline the
adjectives and adverbs in these
sentences.


 Tell students the difference between
adjectives and adverbs and how they
are used in a sentence.


 Give them some more adjectives and
adverbs, then ask them to write more
sentences, using the adjectives and
adverbs given.


 Let students take notes.
 <b>A5</b>


 Have them read over the text.


 Tell them how to do this kind of
exercise.


 Explain some new difficult words:
stay away, deep end, pool edge
 Let students complete with correct


adverbs.


 Call some students and ask them to


read the text loudly.


 Correct if there any msitakes.


-pool edge (n)


-strick (a) nghiêm khắc
-risks (n) hiểm họa
<i><b>Grammar</b></i><b>:</b>Adj and Adv


- Tính từ đứng trước danh từ hoặc
sau động từ liên kết (linking verbs)
như: be, become, feel, get, seem,
grow, look, taste, smeel, sound…
 Ex: Mai is an intelligent


student.


 Ex2: My house is small.
 Ex3: He looks sad.


- Trạng từ bổ nghĩa cho tính từ và
động từ.


 Ex1: The question is very
difficult.


 Ex2: He drives carefully.
- Cách thành lập trạng từ:



Thêm hậu tố -ly vào tính từ
 Ex: Safe  safely


<b> Consolidation :</b>


<i><b>Exercise1: </b></i><b>Write the adverbs corresponding to the adjectives. The first one is done for you.</b>


<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Complete the sentences. Use the adjectives or adverbs in bracket.</b><i><b> </b></i>
Adjectives Adverb


Good
Bad
Slow
Quick
Safe
Skillful
Sudden
dangerous


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

1. My daughter can sing very ……… (good / well)
2. She is a ……… girl. (beautiful / beautifully)
3. Is he a ……… runner? (slow / slowly)


4. My mother is a ……… woman. (careful / carefully)


5. What do you think about her? Does she work ……… (lazy / lazily)?
6. Tom plays badminton ……… (skillful / skillfully)


7. Mary sings ……… (extreme / extremely) beautifully.
8. Are you a ……… (safe / safely) cyclist?



Homework<b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


- learn by heart the new words.


<b>-</b> Do exercise 2 page 82 in workbook.


<b>-</b> Prepare period 83 ( <b>New words, Questions A4, 6)</b>


<b> Week 28 </b>

<b>Period 83</b>

<b>Unit 13:</b>

<b>ACTIVITIES</b>


<b>A</b>

<b>4</b>

<b>, </b>

<b>6</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


<b>-</b> Students learn how to describe and talk about sports and other entertainments.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: <i>Revision</i>: Adverbs and adjectives.


* Vocabulary: (v)take part in (n)WFF = walking for fun ,competition ,district , prize .
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>



<b> Pre- reading :</b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>


 New lesson:


- T introduces the new lesson by hanging
three pictures on the board and then
explains them to the students.


<b> Swimming</b>


<b> </b>


<b> SPORTS</b>


<b> NEW WORDS;</b>


-take part in (v) tham gia
-WFF = walking for fun
-competition (n) cuộc thi
-district (n) quận


-prize (n) giải thưởng
-therefore (conj) vì vậy
-organize (v) tổ chức



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

<b>While- reading :</b>


<b>Post- reading :</b>


- Ask them some questions which are
mentioned to three pictures. And then, T
teaches new lesson.


- T reads the first time.


- Students are asked to repeat once.
- Let them read the text themselves.
- T helps them to find out the new words.
- T guides them how to read vocabulary.
- Ask some students to read the text


aloud to the class. (each student for one
paragraph)


- Have <b>two pairs role-play</b> the dialogue
in class.


- Ask them to give answer to the
questions given.


- Have students <b>work in pairs.</b>


- Ask students to add the missing verbs
to the instructions.



- Ask students to match the instructions
to the pictures.


- Call on some students to give the
answer in front of the class.


- Give correct answers.


-participants (n) người tham dự
-increase (v) tăng


-WTS: walk to school
-volunteer (v) tình nguyện
-instead of (prep) thay vì
-ability (n) khả


<i>Answer</i>:


1. The write takes part in Walking
For Fun club.


2. Because everyone was so
happy and wished to keep this
activity.


3. They are: WFF and WTS.
4. It’s about 5 km.


5. Wednesday is the WTS day of


the club.


Members living near school often
takes part in the WTS day.


<i><b>Exercise: </b><b> Complete the sentences. Use the adjectives or adverbs in bracket</b><b> .</b><b> </b></i>
1.My daughter can sing very ……… (good / well)


2.She is a ……… girl. (beautiful / beautifully)
3.Is he a ……… runner? (slow / slowly)


4.My mother is a ……… woman. (careful / carefully)


5.What do you think about her? Does she work ……… (lazy / lazily)?
6.Tom plays badminton ……… (skillful / skillfully)


7Mary sings ……… (extreme / extremely) beautifully.
8.Are you a ……… (safe / safely) cyclist


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Write “Remember” in your notebook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

- Prepare the B1,2.


<b> Week 28 </b>

<b>Period 84</b>

<b>Unit 13:</b>

<b>ACTIVITIES</b>


<b>B1,2</b>





<b>I. Objectives:</b>


<b>-</b> Students learn how to describe and talk about sports and other entertainments.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: <i>Revision</i>: Adverbs and adjectives.


* Vocabulary: (adj)Skillful ,awareness (v)improve (n) kid ,lifeguard.
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
 Let students look at the pictures and


ask them what Ba and Nam are doing.


Then, introduce the situation.


 Let them listen to the cassette twice,
then have them repeat.


 Call some pairs play the roles of Nam
and Ba before class.


 Let them practice with their partner.
 Ask them to pick out the modal verbs


<b> Swimming</b>


<b> </b>


<b> SPORTS</b>
<b>NEW WORDS</b>
-table tennis (n)
-paddle (n)


wait for some one.
Spare= free (adj)
Grammar:


Modal verbs: Can, must, have to,
ought to, should


Tr

inh Tu Thanh 157 Phu Son lower secondary school



Mightn’t


Can’t
Mustn’t
Shouldn’t


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity3 :</b>


and give the information of the three
forms as quickly as possible.


 Let them ask and answer the questions.
 Have them take notes the modal verbs


and the formation.


 . Let students look at the pictures and
ask them what Ba and Nam are doing.
Then, introduce the situation.


 Let them listen to the cassette twice,
then have them repeat.


 Call some pairs play the roles of Nam
and Ba before class.


 Let them practice with their partner.
 Ask them to pick out the modal verbs


and give the information of the three


forms as quickly as possible.


 Let them ask and answer the questions.
 Have them take notes the modal verbs


and the formation.


<i>Answer</i>:


1.Nam should finish his homework
before he plays table tennis.


2.Nam will be ready in a few minutes.
3.Ba will finish a question for Math.
4.Ba has two paddles.


<b> Consolidation :Exercise1: </b><i><b> Multiple choice</b></i>


1) My father is a ………. Football player.


A. skill B. skillful C. skillfully


2) He also cycles ……….


A. safe B. safety C. safely


3) As a child, he ………. His parents.


A. ought to obey B. ought to obeying C. ought obey
4) ………. Something to eat?



A. Would you to like B. Would you like C. Would you liked
5) Come and ………. Badminton, Nam!


A. do B. take C. play


<i><b>Homework</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


<b>-</b> Do exercise 4 page 84 in workbook.


<b>-</b> Prepare period 85 (B3, 4, 5)


Can


Must + S + V (bare)… ?
Should


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

<b> Week 29 </b>

<b>Period 85</b>

<b>Unit 13:</b>

<b>ACTIVITIES</b>


<b>B</b>

<b>4</b>

<b>, </b>

<b>5,6.</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


<b>-</b> Students learn how to describe and talk about sports and other entertainments.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: <i>Model verbs.</i>.


* Vocabulary: surface (n) ocean (n) stay underwater (v)dive (v) diver (n) a person who dives
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays



<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Pre- reading :</b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>


 New lesson:


- T introduces the new lesson by hanging
three pictures on the board and then
explains them to the students.
- Ask them some questions which are


mentioned to three pictures. And then, T
teaches new lesson.


<b> Swimming</b>


<b> </b>



<b> SPORTS</b>
<b> NEW WORDS;</b>
-surface (n)
-ocean (n)


-stay underwater (v
-dive (v) lặn


-diver (n) a person who dives
-pearl (n)


-breathing equipment (n)
-special (a)


-invention (n)
-invent (v)


-scuba-diving (n)
-vessel (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

<b>While- reading :</b>


<b>Post- reading :</b>


- T reads the first time.


- Students are asked to repeat once.
- Let them read the text themselves.
- T helps them to find out the new words.
- T guides them how to read vocabulary.


- Ask some students to read the text


aloud to the class. (each student for one
paragraph)


- Have <b>two pairs role-play</b> the dialogue
in class.


- Ask them to give answer to the
questions given.


- Have students <b>work in pairs.</b>


- Ask students to add the missing verbs
to the instructions.


- Ask students to match the instructions
to the pictures.


- Call on some students to give the
answer in front of the class.


- Give correct answers.


-explore (v)
<b>Questions</b>


a. F Most of the world’s is water.
b. T.



C. F. Now, scuba – diving is a
popular sport……….


d. F. Jacques cousteau invented
a deep- sea diving vessel.


e. T.


<b> B4: </b>


1.can 2.must 3.mustn’t
4.should 5.can 6.ought to
/should


7.can / should


<i><b>Consolidation</b><b> :</b><b> </b></i>


<i><b>Exercise1: </b></i>Matching column A with column B


A B


1) Lan has a toothache


2) Na gets bad marks at Math.
3) Minh is always late for school.
4) Chi’s aunt is overweight.


a.He ought to get up early.
b.She ought to see a dentist.


c.She ought to study harder.


d.He ought to eat more vegetables.
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

<b> Week 29 </b>

<b>Period 86</b>

<b>Unit 14:</b>

<b>FREETIME FUN</b>


<b>A1</b>




<b> I Objectives:</b>


-Students learn how to express what they do in their free time, to invite or suggest someone
and reply to an invitation or suggestions. They can tell about their favor and their favorite TV
programme.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Like + to-infinitive / Gerund
-Prefer + V_ing


-Prepositions and expressions of time.


* <i>Vocabulary : </i> news in English (n) series: “The Adventure of the Cricket”news (n) prefer / like + to_inf (v)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>



<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
 <i>New lesson</i>:


 <b>A1</b>:


 Introduce the topic.


 Ask questions about their favorite TV
programmes.


 Show students the schedule of the TV
programme and ask them where they
can read it.


 Ask them to look at the picture and
guess what the members of Hoa’s


<b> WATCH TV</b>



<b> </b>


<b> THINGS TO DO</b>
<i><b>-Play footbal.</b></i>
<i><b>-Do homework.</b></i>
<b>NEW WORDS</b>


-news in English (n) bản tin tiếng Anh
-series: “The Adventure of the


Cricket”


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity3 :</b>


family are doing.


 Introduce the conversation they are
going to listen.


 Let them listen to the answer twice, then
repeat sentence by sentence.


 Ask questions to elicit the new words
and new structure.<b> practice in pairs.</b>


 Mention the structure “like/prefer to +


infinitive”


 Let them <b>practice in pairs.</b>


 Call some pairs to do the conversation
before class.


 Ask them to do the exercises by
themselves.


 Call some students to give their
answers.


 Check and correct if necessary.


 Ask students to copy the dialogue, do
the translation, write the answers and
memorize it.


<b>-</b>boring (a) chán
<i><b>Key:</b></i>


<b>a) C</b>
<b>b) A</b>
<b>c) B</b>
<b>d) C</b>
<b> e) D</b>


<b> Consolidation :Exercise1: </b><i><b> Multiple choice</b></i>



1. My father prefers………. Football .
A. playing B. play C. plays
2. He likes driving the car.……….


A. safe B. safety C. safely
3. As a child, he loved…………. His parents.


A. obey B. obeying C. obeys
4. My father prefers………. Football .


A. play B. to play C. plays
<i><b>Homework</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


- Learn by heart the new words.


<b>-</b> Do exercise 1,2 page 88 in workbook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>Week 29 </b>

<b>Period 87</b>

<b>Unit 14:</b>

<b>FREETIME FUN</b>


<b>A2,4</b>




<b> I Objectives:</b>


-Students learn how to express what they do in their free time, to invite or suggest someone
and reply to an invitation or suggestions. They can tell about their favor and their favorite TV
programme.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: WOULD you like + to-infinitive ..? Be going to……..


-Prefer / like+ to inf / gerund


-Prepositions and expressions of time.


<b>* </b><i><b>Vocabulary</b></i> cowboy movie (n) New Age Theater (n)


<b> III. Techniques</b>: Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a ciirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>
 <i>New lesson</i>:


 <b>A1</b>:


 Introduce the topic.



 Some them some posters about some
films and entertainment programmes.
 Ask them to <b>work in pairs,</b> tell what


they want to do in their free time and
what they dislike.


 Show Hoa and Lan’s schedule ask
questions about Hoa and Lan’s
activities.


<b> WATCH TV</b>


<b> </b>


<b> THINGS TO DO</b>
<i><b>-Play footbal.</b></i>
<i><b>-Do homework.</b></i>
<b>NEW WORDS</b>


-cowboy movie (n) film cao bồi
-New Age Theater (n) Rạp thời đại
mới


-Can you make it on …?
-Would you like …?
-Let’s …


-What about …?



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity3 :</b>


 Introduce the content of the dialogue
the students are going to listen.


 Let them listen to the cassette, have
them repeat chorally, then <b>practice in</b>
<b>pairs.</b>


 Ask them to notice the suggestion or
polite requests with “Would you like…?
Let’s …, What about you? Can you
make it on …?


 Ask students to make other dialogue,
using the information given in their
schedule and the advertising posters.
 Call <b>some pairs</b> of students and have


them pratice before class. Correct if
there are any mistakes.


Practice:


A: Would you like to go to the theater this
week?


B: That sounds great. What would you like


to see?


A: There is a play on the Young Theater.
B: OK. Can you make it on Monday night?
A: Sorry. The theater doesn’t open on
Monday nights. How about Wednesday?
B: I’m sorry I think I can’t. I’m going to learn
for my English test. What about Saturday?
Are you free that day?


A: Yes, I am. Let’s go on Saturday.
 <b>A4</b>: <b>Play with words</b>


 Read the poem aloud.


 Ask some students to reread, then
copy in their notebook.


 Let them learn by heart.


-detective movie (n) film trinh thám
<i><b>Key:</b></i>


<b>e) C</b>
<b>f) A</b>
<b>g) B</b>
<b>h) C</b>
<b> e) D</b>


<b>4. </b>



<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>
<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Matching.</b><i><b> </b></i>


A B


Play
Have
Watch
Go
Spend
Go
Switch
listen


Dinner
Chess


Boring things
On the TV


The English news on TV
Swimming


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

<b>5. </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Homework</b></i><b> : </b>


<b>- </b>Learn by heard all new words.



<b>-</b> Do exercise 3,4 page 89 in workbook.


<b>-</b> Prepare period 88 (A3)


<b> Week 30</b>

<b> </b>

<b>Period 88</b>

<b>Unit 14:</b>

<b>FREETIME FUN</b>


<b>A3</b>




<b> I Objectives:</b>


-Students learn how to express what they do in their free time, to invite or suggest someone
and reply to an invitation or suggestions. They can tell about their favor and their favorite TV
programme.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Like + to-infinitive / Gerund
Prefer + V_ing


Prepositions and expressions of time.


<b>* </b><i><b>Vocabulary</b><b> : </b></i> owner (n) gather (v) = assemble (v)until (adv) change (v) life (n)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>



<b> Pre- reading :</b>


<b>While- reading :</b>


<b>CHATTING:</b>


<b>Do you often watch TV?</b>
<b>How often do you watch TV?</b>
<b>Which programs do you like best?</b>
 New lesson:


 <b>A3</b>:


 Introduce the topic.


 Ask some questions to attract students.
Do you like watching TV?


Do you have a TV set at home?
What about your neighbors?
How often do you watch TV?


<b> NEW WORDS;</b>
-owner (n) chủ


-gather (v) = assemble (v)
-until (adv)


-change (v)


-life (n)
ANSWER:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

<b>Post- reading :</b>


 Introduce the new text.
 Read over text.


Ask some more questions to elicit the new
words.<b> Work in pairs.</b>


 Have them read the text by
themselves carefully.


Let them fill the blanks with approriate
words.<b> Work in pairs.</b>


- Call some students and ask them to
read the exercise aloud. Correct if there
are any mistakes and give more
explanation if necessary..


10. Life
11. know


<b>4. </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>
<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Matching.</b><i><b> </b></i>



A B


Play
Have
Watch
Go
Spend
Go
Switch
listen


Dinner
Chess


Boring things
On the TV


The English news on TV
Swimming


To the radio
Wonderful time


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

<b>Week 30 </b>

<b>Period 89</b>

<b>Unit 14:</b>

<b>FREETIME FUN</b>


<b>B1,2.</b>





<b> I Objectives:</b>


-Students learn how to express what they do in their free time, to invite or suggest someone
and reply to an invitation or suggestions. They can tell about their favor and their favorite TV
programme.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Like + to-infinitive / Gerund
-Prefer + V_ing


-Prepositions and expressions of time.


<b>* Vocabulary</b><i><b> :</b><b> </b></i><b>-</b>old  older (a) sport show (n) carToon (n) early news (n) the world today (n)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>
<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>CHATTING:</b>



<b>Do you often watch TV?</b>
<b>How often do you watch TV?</b>
<b>Which programs do you like best?</b>
 New lesson:


 <b>B1</b>:


-Introduce the topic.


-Ask students to look at the picture
and tell the class about the two
characters on the screen.


-Have them observe and tell what kind
of film is on.<b>Work in pairs.</b>


-Let them listen to the cassette twice.
-Have them repeat sentence by
sentence.


-Call <b>2 pairs</b> to practice the dialogue
before class.


-Ask them to pick out the sentences in


<b>NEW WORDS</b>


-old  older (a)



-sport show (n)
-prefer (v)


-carToon (n) film hoạt hình
<i>Questions</i>:


1.No, she doesn’t. Because there aren’t
many good programs for teenagers.


2.He likes to watch sports shows, cartoons
and movies.


3. She likes to watch programs about
teenagers in other countries.


4Because they don’t play the kind of music
she likes.


5. She’s going to listen to the radio and
read a book.


<b>*NEW WORDS</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

<b>Activity :3</b>


<b> Pre-listening </b>


<b>While- listening</b>


<b>Post-listening</b>



which there are “like to + Bare_inf /
V_ing


-Write all these sentences on the
board.


-I like to watch programs about
teenagers.


-I prefer talking part in them.


-Have them repratice with their
partners.


-Ask questions and have them
answers. Correct if necessary.


-Ask them to copy the dialogue, do the
translation and learn by heart.


 <b>B2</b>:


-Show them the pictures and
programs listed.


-Ask them what their favorite program
is.


-Tell them the purpose of this listening


exercise.


-Ask them to note the times of the
programs while listening.


-Check and give key answers.


-weather forecast (n) dự báo thời tiết
<i>Key</i>:


Ba: What is on TV at six tonight, Lan?
Lan: Let me see. It’s the early news. You
want to watch it, don’t you?


Ba: Come on, Lan! I want to watch the
movie “A fistful of dollars”. When does it
start?


Lan: It starts at seven o’clock, after the
program “The World Today” at quarter past
six.


Ba: And what about the weather forecast?
What time is it on?


Lan: It’s on at ten past six. But we should
watch our children’s program. It starts at
five.


<b>ANSWER:</b>



A.Children’s programs<b>: at five</b> five
B.Early news: <b>six tonight</b>


C.Weather forecast: <b>ten past six</b>
D.The world today: <b>at quarter past six</b>
E.Movie: “A fistful of dollars”: <b>at seven</b>


<b>* </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>


<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Rewrite in negative and interrogative statements</b><i><b> </b></i><b>.</b>
1) You should watch T.V so long.


2) We have to do our homework before watching T.V.
3) She must ride her bike carefully.


4) You had better read these comics.
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

<b> Week 30</b>

<b> </b>

<b>Period 90</b>

<b>Unit 14:</b>

<b>FREETIME FUN</b>


<b>B1,2.</b>




<b> I Objectives:</b>


-Students learn how to express what they do in their free time, to invite or suggest someone


and reply to an invitation or suggestions. They can tell about their favor and their favorite TV
programme.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Like + to-infinitive / Gerund
Prefer + V_ing


Prepositions and expressions of time.


<b>* </b><i><b>Vocabulary</b><b>:</b><b> </b></i>short form (n) audience (n) the latest pop music: nhạc pop; singer (n) perform (v) contest (n)


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>
<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>CHATTING:</b>


<b>Do you often watch TV?</b>
<b>How often do you watch TV?</b>


<b>Which programs do you like best?</b>
 New lesson:


 <b>B3</b>:


 Introduce the topic.


 Ask students to have a look over
the pictures in the book and tell
what the pictures are about.


 Ask some more questions about
Sherlock Homes and his stories
and the Olympia TV contest.


 Tell them about the passages they
are going to hear.


 Let them listen to the first
paragraph and repeat, then the
second and the third.


 Ask them to reread by themselves.
 Have them ask and answer the


questions <b>in pairs.</b>


 Call some pairs and tell them to


<b>NEW WORDS:</b>



-short form (n) hình thức viết tắt
-audience (n) khán giả


-the latest pop music: nhạc pop mới nhất
-singer (n) ca sĩ


-perform (v) trình diển
-contest (n) cuộc thi
contestant (n) thí sinh


-folk music (n) nhạc dân gian
-TV viewer (n) khán giả truyền hình
-join in (v) = take part in (v)


-mail (n) = letter


-import (n) film ngoại nhập
-TV station (n) đài truyền hình
<i>Questions</i>:


1.They like to hear the latest pop music.
2.They are: students, workers and family
members.


3.They usually include police and hospital
series.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

<b>Activity :3</b>



<b> Pre-writing :</b>


<b>While-writing </b>
<b>Post-writing :</b>


ask and answer the questions
before class. Correct if necessary.
 Have them copy the 3 paragraphs,


do the translation and write the
questions and answers at home.


 <b>B4</b>: Write


-Have them read the words given in
the box.


-Ask them to read the passage and
use the words given to complete the
passage.


-Ask some students to read the
passage aloud. Correct if there are
any mistakes.


<b>-Write the passage in six groups.</b>
-Have them copy the passage


story film
English news



<b>*ANSWER</b>


1.And 2.Watch 3.Listen
4.Series 5.Show 6.Tim
7.Station 8.Receive 9.Cities
10.possible


<b>* </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>


<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Write Wh_questions for the answers</b><i><b> </b></i><b>.</b>
1,They watched T.V in their neighbor’s house.
2,There are lots of the “Small flowers” program best.
3,His parents took them to the movies last night
4,T.V station bought many police and hospital series


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Do the exercises 3.4 in the workbook .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

<b> Week:31 Period: 91</b>


<b>TEST ENGLISH 4</b>



<b>I. Objectives: </b>T can check up and appreciate the knowledge, ability of the students, so T should Help Sts
remember about the the knowledge. Students must find the best way to learn if they are not good.



<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: . Present continuous tense, Simple present tense, Future simple tense; Pst simple tense.


Adjective, adverb; indefinite quantifiers , imperative& they can do th

e

exercises.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

<b>Week 31 </b>

<b>Period 92</b>

<b>Unit 15:</b>

<b> GOING OUT</b>


<b>A1.</b>




<b> I Objectives:</b>


Students learn how to give advice and reply on Video Games, and talk about Video Games
and their affects.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Compound adjectives.


<b>* Vocabulary :</b> amusement (n) amusement center (n) addictive (adj) addicted to st (adj)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>



<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity :3</b>


<b>Jumble words:</b>
<b>-oofbllt- football</b>
<b>- cratnoo- cartoon</b>
<b>- swne - news</b>
 New lesson:


 Introduce the topic.


 Show the students some posters
advertising some amusement
centers and sports centers.


 Ask them to tell about the content of
each poster.


 Let them talk to one another about
their favorite hobby.


 Tell them about the content of the
dialogue they’re going to listen then.
 Let them listen to the dialogue twice.
 Ask them to practice the dialogue



with their partners<b>. Work in pairs.</b>
 Ask questions to elicit the meaning


of the words: video, addictive,
arcade.


 Mention how to express the advice.
Use “Don’t spend too much of your
time” and “Don’t worry, I won’t”
 Let students ask and <b>answer in</b>


<b>pairs.</b>


 Call some students to practice the
dialogue aloud.


<b>NEW WORDS:</b>


-amusement (n) vui chơi, giải trí


-amusement center (n) trung tâm giải trí
-addictive (adj) có tác dụng gây nghiện
-addicted to st (adj) nghiện, ghiền
Ex: He became addicted to drugs last
year.


-arcade (n) khu vui chơi, vui bán


<i>Key of Questions</i>:



1. Nam is going to the amusement
center.


2. He’s going to play video games.
3. He goes to there once a week.
4. No, he doesn’t.


5. He usually stays for about an
hour.


6. Because Video Games can be
addictive.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

 Let them do some free practice
similar to the questions given in the
book.


 Have them copy the dialogue do the
translation and write the answers in
the notebook at home.


<b>* </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>


<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets</b><i><b> </b></i><b>.</b>
1)Hoa (live)………. in a big city last year.


2)We (not go)………. anywhere next summer.



3)……….They (play) ………video games with their friends tonight?
4)…… you (cross)………. busy streets now?


5) He (not take)……… part in his school activities last year.
6) His father (buy)……… him some video games yesterday.
7) She (not like)………. playing chess every day.


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

<b>Week 31 </b>

<b>Period 93</b>

<b>Unit 15:</b>

<b> GOING OUT</b>


<b>A1.</b>




<b> I Objectives:</b>


Students learn how to give advice and reply on Video Games, and talk about Video Games
and their affects.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Modal verbs, forget ………, spend…….v-ng.


<b>* Vocabulary :</b> amusement (n) amusement center (n) addictive (adj) addicted to st (adj)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>



<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity :3</b>


<b>Jumble words:</b>
<b>-oofbllt- football</b>
<b>- cratnoo- cartoon</b>
<b>- swne – news</b>
 New lesson:


 Introduce the topic.
 Listen to the tape .


 Read and find the new words.


 Listen and repeat the new words
after the teacher.


 Tell them about the content of the
dialogue they’re going to listen then.
 Let them listen to the dialogue twice



Again.


 Ask them to practice the dialogue
with their partners<b>. Work in pairs.</b>
 Ask questions to elicit the meaning


and ask them to give the answers.
 Let students ask and give the


answer.


 Call some students to practice the
dialogue aloud.


 Let them do some free practice
similar to the questions given in the


<b>NEW WORDS:</b>
-dizzy (adj)
-indoor ( prep)
-outdoor (prep)
-skill(n)


- social (adj) social skill.
<b>ANSWERS A2</b><i><b>;</b></i><b> </b>


a. D play b. A become
c. D d. B


<b>ANSWERS A3;</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

book.


 Have them copy the dialogue do the
translation and write the answers in
the notebook at home.


<b>* </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>


<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets</b><i><b> </b></i><b>.</b>
1)Hoa (live)………. in a big city now.


2)He (not go)………. anywhere next summer.


3)……….you (play) ………video games with their friends tonight?
4)…… you (cross)………. busy streets now?


5)He (not take)……… part in his school activities last year.
2) His father often (buy)……… him some video games .
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Do the exercises 2 in the workbook page 94.
- Prepare B1 ( <b>New words and questions).</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

<b> Week 32</b>

<b> </b>

<b>Period 94</b>

<b>Unit 15:</b>

<b> GOING OUT</b>


<b>B1.</b>





<b> I Objectives:</b>


Students learn how to give advice and reply on Video Games, and talk about Video Games
and their affects.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Modal verbs, forget ………, spend…….v-ng.
<b>* Vocabulary :</b> get used to , busy (adj) free (adj)


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity :3</b>


<b>CHATTING:</b>



<b>Do you often watch TV?</b>
<b>How often do you watch TV?</b>
<b>Which programs do you like best</b>
 New lesson:


 Introduce the topic.
 Listen to the tape .


 Read and find the new words.


 Listen and repeat the new words
after the teacher.


 Practice reading the new words in
<b>individually and chotally.</b>


 Tell them about the content of the
dialogue they’re going to listen then.
 Let them listen to the dialogue twice


Again.


 Ask them to practice the dialogue
with their partners<b>. Work in pairs.</b>
 Ask and answer the questions <b>in</b>


<b>the groups or pairs</b>


 Let students ask and give the


answer.


 Call some students to practice the
dialogue aloud.


<b>NEW WORDS:</b>
<b>-</b>get used to + v-ing :
-busy (adj)


-free (adj)
- noisy(adj)
-quiet(adj)
<b>ANSWERS </b><i><b>;</b></i><b> </b>


1. She goes to school theater once a
week . The rest of the week she usually
stays at home in the evening.


2. No, she doesn’t like the city.


3. Before , Hoa lived in a village in hue.
4. She liked living there bacause she
knew all the people in her neighborhood :
the village was quiet and there was only
a little traffic.


5. She doesn’t like the city because it is
noisy and the roads are busy.


6. She hates crossing the roads most


because bikes , motorbikes , and


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

 Let them do some free practice
similar to the questions given in the
book.


 Have them copy the dialogue do the
translation and write the answers in
the notebook at home.


<b>* </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>


<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>choose the best answer </b><i><b> </b></i><b>.</b>
1)Hoa likes………. in a big city .
a. lives b. live c. living
2)He hates………. in a big city .
a. living b. live c. lives
3. the city is ……….


a. busy b. quiet c. free
4. the village is ……….


a. busy b. quiet c. noisy
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Do the exercises 3 in the workbook page 95.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

Week 32

<b>Period 95</b>

<b>Unit 15:</b>

<b> GOING OUT</b>


<b>B2+4.</b>




<b> I Objectives:</b>


Students learn how to give advice and reply on the city or the country and talk about why
they like living in the city or the country..


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: past simple temse.


<b>* Vocabulary :</b> -table tennis(n) chess(n) soccer match(n)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>



<b>Activity :3</b>


<b>Pre-listening </b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a cirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two</b>
<b>groups.</b>


<b>-Group has more idea that is winner.</b>


 New lesson:


 Introduce the new lesson and write
down the tittle on the board.


 Ask them to practice asking and
answering the questions with their
partners<b>. Work in pairs.</b>


 Ask some <b>pairs</b> to ask and answer
the questions.


 Let students ask and give the
answer.


 Call some students to practice the
dialogue aloud.



 Let them do some free practice
similar to the questions given in the
book.


 Have them copy the answers in the
notebook at home.


 <b>B4</b>:


<b> FRIENTLY</b>


<b> </b>


<b> LIFE IN THE COUTRY.</b>
- QUIET.


- ONLY ALITTLE TRAFFIC.
<b>NEW WORDS:</b>


-table tennis(n)
-chess(n)


-soccer match(n)
<b>ANSWERS B2 </b><i><b>;</b></i><b> </b>


a.I often learn my lesson and watch TV.
b. no, idon’t bacause there is too noisy.
Yes, I do bacause it is very easy for
me to learn or get the knowledge.
c. Yes, I do.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

<b>While- listening</b>


<b>Post-listening</b>


-Show them the pictures and programs
listed.


-Ask them what their favorite program
is.


-Tell them the purpose of this listening
exercise.


-Ask them to note the times of the
programs while listening.


-Check and give the answers
- Copy the answers


Ba: <b>b </b>


-Yester day evenig, Baplayed table
tennis.


Nam; <b>c</b>


- Nam listened to CDS.
Hoa <b>; a </b>



-Hoa played chess.
Nga<b>; d</b>


- Nga saw a movie.
Lan <b>; f</b>


- Lan went to a restaurant.
An <b>: e</b>


-An watched a soccer match.
<b>* </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>


<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>choose the best answer </b><i><b> </b></i><b>.</b>


1)Hoa doesn’t like………. in a big city .
a. lives b. live c. living


2)He likes………. in a big city .
a. living b. live c. lives
3. the city is ……….


a. noisy b. quiet c. free
4. ………..you like to the countryside?
a. Do b. Does c. Are
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.



- Do the exercises 4 in the workbook page 96.
- Prepare B3 ( <b>new words , questions )</b>


<b> </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

<b>B3.</b>



<b> I Objectives:</b>


Students learn how to give advice and reply on the city or the country and talk about why
they like living in the city or the country..


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: past simple temse.


<b>* Vocabulary :</b> -rarely (adv) = seldom= hardly , society (n) , socialize (v) cost (v)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Pre- reading :</b>


<b>While- reading :</b>



<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a cirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner</b>
 New lesson:


 <b>B3</b>:


 Introduce the topic.
 Listen to the tape twice.


 Read and find out the new words.
 Ask sts to give the new words.


 Practice reading the new words in
<b>individually and chorally.</b>


 Ask students.some questions .


 What did Hoa and her frients often do
together?


 Why did Hoa rarely go to the movie?
-Ask some more questions to elicit the new
words.<b> Work in pairs.</b>


-Have them read the text by themselves
carefully.



-Call some students and ask them to read
the passage aloud. Correct if there are any
mistakes and give more if necessary..


-Ask them to read and answer the
<b>questions in groups</b>.


<b> WASH PACE</b>


<b> </b>


<b> ACTIVITY EVERY DAY.</b>
- Listen to music.


- Watch TV.
- Play tenis.


<b> NEW WORDS;</b>


-rarely (adv) = seldom= hardly
-society (n)


-socialize (v)


cost (v) cost nothing
begin (v) = start


<b>ANSWER:</b>


1. She visits her frients.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

<b>Post- reading :</b> -Ask some pairs to read and answer the
questions .


- Write the correct answers on the board.
-Check and give the answers


- Copy the answers


with her frients.


3. They help each other with their
homework.


4. She plays table tennis and
plays chess with her frients.
5. She socializes with her frients.
6. She goes to the library and
borrow books.


<b>4. </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>
<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Matching.</b><i><b> </b></i>


A B


Play
Have
Watch


Go
Spend
Go
Switch
listen


Dinner
Chess


Boring things
On the TV


The English news on TV
Swimming


To the radio
Wonderful time


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Write “Remember” in your notebook
- Do the exercises 5 in the workbook .
- Prepare the A1 UNIT 16.


<b> Week 33 </b>

<b>Period 97</b>

<b>Unit 16:</b>

<b>PEOPLE AND PLACES</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

- By The end of the lesson , Students know and talk about the famous people and place in
VN and ASIA



<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: past simple temse, simple present.


<b>* Vocabulary</b> : - postcard (n) pilot (n) fly (v) occasional (adj) occasionally (adv) bring (v)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity :3</b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a cirle with an example on the</b>
<b>board. Divide the class into two groups.</b>
<b>-Group has more idea that is winner</b>
 New lesson:



 <b>A1</b>:


 Introduce the topic.
 Listen to the tape twice.


 Read and find out the new words.
 Ask sts to give the new words.


 Practice reading the new words in
<b>individually and chorally.</b>


-Ask some more questions to elicit the new
words.


-<b> Work in pairs.</b>


-Have them read the text by themselves
carefully.


-Call some students and ask them to read
the passage aloud. Correct if there are any
mistakes and give more if necessary..


-Ask them to read and answer the
<b>exercise in groups</b>.


-Ask some pairs to read and answer the
matching. .


- Write the correct answers on the board.


-Check and give the answers


- Copy the answers


<b> Phong Nha Cave.</b>


<b> </b>


<b>LANDSCAPES IN VIET NAM.</b>
- Ha Long Bay.


- DA LAT.


<b> NEW WORDS;</b>
-postcard (n)
-pilot (n)
-fly (v)


-occasional (adj)
-occasionally (adv)
-bring (v)


<b>ANSWER:</b>


a+D b+ F
c +B d + C
e + A f + E
<b>4. </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

A B


1.Viet Nam


2. Thai Lan
3. sigapore
4. Laos
5. Cambodia


a. singapore
b. Phnom penh
c. Vientiane
d. Bangkok
e. Ha Noi


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Do the exercises 1 in the workbook page 99.
- Prepare the A2+3 UNIT 16. ( coutry and capital)


<b> Week 33 </b>

<b>Period 98</b>

<b>Unit 16:</b>

<b>PEOPLE AND PLACES</b>



<b>A2+3.</b>



<b> I Objectives:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: past simple temse, simple present.



<b>* Vocabulary</b> : - postcard (n) pilot (n) fly (v) occasional (adj) occasionally (adv) bring (v)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>
<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity :3</b>


<b>Pre-listening </b>


<b>* WRITING:</b>


<b>Capital Country</b>
1. Bangkok  Thailand
2. Phnompenh 


3. Kuala lumber 
4. Vientiance 
5. Ha Noi 
 New lesson:



 Introduce the topic.
 Listen to the tape twice.


 Read and find out the new words.
 Ask sts to give the new words.


 Practice reading the new words in
<b>individually and chorally.</b>


-Ask some more questions to elicit the new
words.


-<b> Work in pairs.</b>


-Have them read the text by themselves
carefully.


-Call some students and ask them to read
the passage aloud. Correct if there are any
mistakes and give more if necessary..


-Ask them to read and answer the
<b>exercise in groups</b>.


-Ask some pairs to read and answer the
matching. .


- Write the correct answers on the board.
-Check and give the answers



- Copy the answers.
 <b>A3</b>:


-Show them the pictures and programs


<b>ANSWER A2:</b>


1. Bangkok <b> Thailand</b>
2. Beijing <b> China</b>
3. Phnompenh <b>Cambodia</b>
3. Kuala lumber <b> Maylaysia</b>
4. Vientiance <b>Laos</b>
5. Yangon <b> Myanma</b>
6. Jakarta <b>Indonesia</b>
<b>Questions</b>


1.He sometimes flies to Bangkok.
2. It is in Thai land.


<b>ANSWER A3:</b>


-Mon: <b>Bangkok and Singapore</b>.
- Tue: <b>Singapore.</b>


-Wed : J<b>akarta</b>.
- Thu <b>: Bali.</b>
- Fri : <b>Bali.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

<b>While- listening </b>



<b>Post-listening</b>


listed.


-Ask them what their favorite program is.
-Tell them the purpose of this listening
exercise.


-Ask them to note the times of the
programs while listening.


-Check and give the answers
- Copy the answers


<b>4. </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>
<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Matching.</b><i><b> </b></i>


A B


1.Viet Nam
2. Thai Lan
3. sigapore
4. Laos
5. Cambodia


a. singapore
b. Phnom penh
c. Vientiane


d. Bangkok
e. Ha Noi


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Do the exercises 2 in the workbook page 99.
- Prepare the A 4 UNIT 16. ( coutry and capital)


<b> Week 33 </b>

<b>Period 99</b>

<b>Unit 16:</b>

<b>PEOPLE AND PLACES</b>



<b>A4.</b>



<b> I Objectives:</b>


- By The end of the lesson , Students know and talk about the famous people and place in
VN and ASIA . They can get the information about the attractive places.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

<b>* Vocabulary</b> : - postcard (n) pilot (n) fly (v) occasional (adj) occasionally (adv) bring (v)
<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>



<b>Presentation:</b>
<b>Activity :1 </b>


<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity :3</b>


<b>* WRITING:</b>


<b>Capital Country</b>
1. Bangkok <b> Thailand</b>
2. Beijing <b> </b>


3. Phnompenh 
4. Kuala lumber 
5. Vientiance 
6. Yangon 
7. Jakarta 
 New lesson:


 Introduce the topic.
 Listen to the tape twice.


 Read and find out the new words.
 Ask sts to give the new words.
 Practice reading the new words in


<b>individually and chorally.</b>



-Ask some more questions to elicit the
new words.


-<b> Work in pairs.</b>


-Have them read the text by
themselves carefully.


-Call some students and ask them to
read the passage aloud. Correct if
there are any mistakes and give more
if necessary..


-Ask them to read and answer the
<b>exercise in groups</b>.


-Ask some pairs to read and answer
the matching. .


- Write the correct answers on the
board.


-Check and give the answers
- Copy the answers.


<b>New words:</b>


- attractive (adj)
- attraction (n)
- resort (n)


- ancient (adj)


- ancient monument
- admire (v )


- coral (n)
- buddhist (n)
<b>ANSWER :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

<b>4. </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>
<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Matching.</b><i><b> </b></i>


A B


1.Viet Nam
2. Thai Lan
3. sigapore
4. Laos
5. Cambodia


a. singapore
b. Phnom penh
c. Vientiane
d. Bangkok
e. Ha Noi


<b>Homework:</b>



- Learn new words carefully.


- Do the exercises 3,4 in the workbook page 100.


- Prepare the B1 UNIT 16. ( New words and true or false.)


<b>Week 34 </b>

<b>Period 100</b>

<b>Unit 16:</b>

<b>PEOPLE AND PLACES</b>



<b>B1.</b>



<b> I Objectives:</b>


-By The end of the lesson , Students know and talk about the famous people and place in VN and
ASIA . They can get the information about the attractive places. Specially General Vo Nguyen Giap.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

* <b>Vocabulary : - </b>history quiz (n) general (adj) army (n) defeat (v) battle (n)
<b> III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays.


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b>Presentation:</b>
<b>Activity :1 </b>



<b>Activity :2</b>


<b>Activity :3</b>


WRITING:


Capital Country
1. Bangkok <b> Thailand</b>
2. Beijing <b> </b>


3. Phnompenh 
4. Kuala lumber 
5. Vientiance 
6. Yangon 
7. Jakarta 
 New lesson:


 Introduce the topic.
 Listen to the tape twice.


 Read and find out the new words.
 Ask sts to give the new words.
 Practice reading the new words
In <b>individually and chorally.</b>


-Ask some more questions to elicit the
new words.


-<b> Work in pairs.</b>



-Have them read the text by
themselves carefully.


-Call some students and ask them to
read the passage aloud. Correct if
there are any mistakes and give more
if necessary..


-Ask them to read and do the
exercise : ( TRUE OR FALSE )<b> in</b>
<b>groups</b>.


-Ask some Sts to give the answer and
correct if it is false .


- Write the correct answers on the
board.


-Check and give the answers
- Copy the answers.


<b>New words:</b>
-history quiz (n)
-general (adj)
-be famous for
-army (n)
-defeat (v)
-battle (n)
<b>ANSWER :</b>



a,

F .Liz knows nothing about General
Giap.


b, F. The people ‘s Army of Viet Nam
defeated the French in 1954.


c, F. The people ‘s Army of Viet Nam
won the battle of Dien Bien Phu.
d, F . General Giap was born in 1911.
e, T


f, F Ba will lend Liz some history
books.


3.<i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

1)Hoa (live)………. in a big city now.


2)He (not go)………. anywhere next summer.


3)……….you (play) ………video games with their friends tonight?
4)…… you (cross)………. busy streets now?


5)He (not take)……… part in his school activities last year.
6)His father often (buy)……… him some video games.
<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook page 102 , 103.


- Prepare the B2+5 UNIT 16.


<b>Week 34 </b>

<b>Period 101</b>

<b>Unit 16:</b>

<b>PEOPLE AND PLACES</b>



<b>B2+5.</b>



<b> I Objectives:</b>


-By The end of the lesson , Students know and talk about the famous people .
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: past simple temse, simple present. My favorite…, I prefer…, why …? Because…..
<b>* Vocabulary : </b>gentle (adj) handsome (adj) powerful (adj)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>
<b>Presentation</b>
<b>Activity :1 </b>
<b>Activity :2</b>
<b>Activity :3</b>
<b>Pre-listening</b>
<b>While- </b>


<b>BRAINING STORMING :</b>


<b>-Give a cirle with an example on</b>


<b>the board. Divide the class into two</b>
<b>groups.</b>


<b>-Group has more idea that is winner</b>
 New lesson:


 Introduce the new lesson and write
down the tittle on the board.


 Explain the content of the new
lesson.


 Read and find out the new words.
 Ask sts to give the new words.
 Practice reading the new words in


<b>individually and chorally.</b>


-Ask some more questions to
complete the dialogue.


-<b> Work in pairs.</b>


<b>-</b>Ask sts to give the answer .
-Correct the mistakes.


-Write the correct answer on the
board.


-Have some pairs read the dialogue


by themselves carefully.


-Call some students and ask them to
read the aloud. Correct if there are
any mistakes and give more if
necessary..


-Ask them to read and answer the
<b>exercise in groups</b>.


-Ask some pairs to read the dialogue.
- Sts copy the correct answers on
their book.


-Check and give the answers
- Copy the answers.


 <b>B5</b>:


-Show them the table and them
some questions about Uncle’s Ho.
-Ask them what they know about the
Uncle’s Ho.


-Tell them the purpose of this listening


<b> Huynh Duc</b>


<b> FAMOUS PEOPLE IN VN</b>
<b>AND THE WORLD</b>



-Romario
-Pele
- My Tam.
- Thanh Bach.


<b> NEW WORDS;</b>
<b>-</b>gentle (adj)
-handsome (adj)
-powerful (adj)
<b>ANSWER B2:</b>
<b>1. like</b>


<b>2. prefer</b>
<b>3. guess</b>
<b>4. favorite</b>


<b>B5: Listen . complete the table.</b>


<b>year</b> <b> Place</b>
<b>Date of birth</b> 1890 Kim lien
Left Viet Nam 1911 SaiGon
Worked in hotel 1900s London
Went to another


country.


1917 paris
Moved again 1923 Moscow
Founded



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

<b>listening </b>
<b></b>
<b>Post-listening</b>


exercise.


-Ask them to note the times of the
informations while listening.


-Check and give the answers
- Copy the correct answers.


Communist Party.


Formed Viet Minh 1941 VN
Became president 1945 Ha Noi


Died 1969 Ha Noi


<i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b>:</b><i><b> </b></i>


<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>choose the best answer </b><i><b> </b></i><b>.</b>


1)Hoa doesn’t like………. in a big city .
a. lives b. live c. living


2)Uncle’ Ho ………born in Nghe AN .
a. was b. were c. is



3. I lived …………..the H C M city two years ago.
a. on b. in c. at


4. ………..you like to live in the countryside last year?
a. Did b. Were c. Are


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Write “Remember” in your notebook.


- Do the exercises 3 in the workbook page 103.
- Prepare the B 4 UNIT 16.


<b> Week 34 </b>

<b>Period 102</b>

<b>Unit 16:</b>

<b>PEOPLE AND PLACES</b>



<b>B4.</b>



<b> I Objectives:</b>


-By The end of the lesson , Students know and talk about the famous people in Viet Nam and the
world.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: past simple temse, simple present.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>a cassette, pictures.
<b>V. Procedures</b>



<b>STEPS</b> <b>METHOD</b> <b>CONTENT</b>


<b>Warm up: </b>


<b> Pre- reading :</b>


<b>While- reading :</b>


<b>Post- reading :</b>


<b>CHATTING :</b>


1.Where was Uncle’s Ho born?
2. What was his date of birth?
3. When did He become President?
 New lesson:


 <b>B4</b>:


 Introduce the topic.
 Listen to the tape twice.


 Read and find out the new words.
 Ask sts to give the new words.


 Practice reading the new words in
<b>individually and chorally.</b>


 Ask students.some questions .


 When was Edison born?
 What did he invent?


 Where was Andersen born??


-Have them read the text by themselves
carefully.


-Call some students and ask them to
read the passage aloud. Correct if there
are any mistakes and give more if
necessary..


-Ask them to read and make the
<b>dialogue in groups</b>.


-Ask some pairs to read and answer the
questions to make in the dialogue.
- Write the correct open dialogue on the
board.


-Check and give the dialogue.
- Copy the correct dialogue.


<b>ANSWER:</b>


1.H e was born in Kim Lien.
2. It was in 1890.


3. He became President in 1945.


<b> NEW WORDS;</b>


<b>-</b>fairy tale (n) = story
- grow ( grew ) up (v)
-bulb (n)


-establish (v)


-the central power station
-gramophone (n)


-motion picture (n)


<b>ANSWER:</b>
<b>Edison.</b>


* A. When were you born, Edison?
B. In 1847.


A.What is your most important
invention?


B. Electric light bulb.
A. When did you invent it?
B. In 1879.


A. What else did you invent , Edison?
B. I invent the gramophore…………..
A. Thak you for your information, Edison.
My please.



<b>Andersen:</b>


A . Hello, Andersen , Can I ask you
some questions.?


B. Certainly.


A. Where were you born?
B. In Denmark.


A. When were you born?
B. In 1805.


A. What did you first want to be?
B. An actor.


A. Which university did you go to ?
B. Copenhagen University.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

B. I n 1835.


A. What else do you write besides fairy
tales?


B. I write novels………..


A. Thank you very much , Andersen.
B. You are welcome.



<b>4. </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Consolidation</b></i><b> : </b>
<i><b>Exercise: </b></i><b>Matching.</b><i><b> </b></i>


A B


1.

Edison



2. Andersen


3. Edison


4. Andersen


5. Andersen


6. Edison



a. was born in Denmark.


b. invented the bulb.


c. was born in 1847.


d. invented in 1879.


e. was born in 1805



f. wrote in 1835

.


<b>Homework:</b>


- Learn new words carefully.


- Write “Remember” in your notebook
- Do the exercises 4 in the workbook .
- Prepare the <b>LANGUAGE FOCUS 5.</b>



<b> Week 35</b>

<b> </b>

<b>Period 103</b>

<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS 5</b>




<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Help the students revise all the structures and vocabulary they have already learnt.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


* Grammar: Simple present, present continuous, simple past, future, like , dislike , because.
* Vocabulary:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>Picture drills, pair work, role plays
<b>IV. Teaching aids:</b>Sub board, pictures.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

<b>Warm up:</b>


<b>Presentation:</b>


<b>Activity 1</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


<b>Activity 3</b>


<b>Activity 4</b>


<b>Activity 5</b>



<b>*Circle the correct answer</b>
- T gives the exercise .


- <b>Sts complete in pair.</b>


*T asks Sts some words or some
questions to help remember the
previous knowledge.


- Ask them to how to form the adj to
adv. <b>Work in pairs</b> to complete
part 1.


- T asks them about the modal
verbs.<b> </b>They give the way how to
use the modal verbs.<b>Work in pairs</b>
to complete part 2.


- T introduces exercise 3 .


- Let them practice <b>in pairs</b> and ask
some <b>pairs</b> to ask , answer.


- Then T corrects.


-T uses real situations to help them
practice about tenses part 4.


<b>-</b>Then T uses pictures about the


tenses. <b>Work in pair or group.</b>


- T asks them to go to the board &
write three columns about the
tenses..


- <b>Work in pair.</b>


- T asks Sts to make the dialogue


<i><b>Exercise: </b></i>


1)Hoa doesn’t like………. in a big city .
a. lives b. live c. living


2)Uncle’ Ho ………born in Nghe AN .
a. was b. were c. is


3. I lived ……the H C M city two years ago.
a. on b. in c. at


4. ………..you like to live in the countryside
last year?


a. Did b. Were c. Are
<b>1. Adjective and adverbs</b>
<b>Answer the questions </b>
1. dangerous.  dangerously
2. slowly slow



3. good  well
<b>2.Modal verbs:</b>


B. a. Can I play soccer , Mom?
First you must practice the piano.
<b>C. </b>a. Hoa: I’m sick.


You : you should go to a doctor.
b. Hoa: I’m hot.


You : you ought to have a cold drink.


<b>3.Expressing ; LIKES AND DISLIKES.</b>
A. What would you like to eat?


B. I’d like spring roll.
<b>4. tenses </b>


<b>Read the sentences . Check the correct </b>
<b>column.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>

<b>Homework</b>


by using <b>BECAUSE</b>.


- T uses somes situations and the
informations in the part 5 to help
them practise. . <b>Work in pair</b>


- T can correct their pronunciation.



- Ask them to do homework
carefully.


- Ask them to look at the pictures to
say about the pictures.


*T writes some exercises to help
them to do at home.


- Learn by heart the old words.the
structures . Reread the old passages
to make <b>THE TEST OF THE</b>
<b>SECOND TERM .</b>


f. present
g. present
h. past
i. present
j. future


<b>5. BECAUSE:</b>
<b>* Ask your parner:</b>


A. What is your favorite color , Hoa ?
B. White.


A. Why?


</div>


<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×